1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
156 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
157 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
158 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
170 by the \SpecialChar LyX
175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
177 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
178 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
179 Documentation mailing list:
180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
182 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
194 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 \begin_inset Note Note
205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
206 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
207 \begin_inset Newline newline
212 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
220 \begin_layout Standard
221 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
222 LatexCommand tableofcontents
229 \begin_layout Chapter
233 \begin_layout Section
234 What is \SpecialChar LyX
238 \begin_layout Standard
240 is a document preparation system.
241 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
242 scripts, publishable books, business
243 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
244 It is unlike most other
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
254 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
270 pt type, left justified, 5
271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
280 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
284 \begin_layout Standard
285 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
290 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
294 \begin_layout Standard
299 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
300 's philosophy: most importantly,
301 the format of all of the manuals.
302 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
303 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
309 manual describes that, too.
312 \begin_layout Section
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
319 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
321 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
322 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
326 \begin_layout Standard
327 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
328 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
329 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
331 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
332 only a vertical scrollbar.
333 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
334 The first case is large images.
335 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
336 image and use the option
347 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
350 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
351 this doesn't work for equations yet.
354 \begin_layout Standard
355 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
356 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
364 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
371 \begin_layout Section
375 \begin_layout Standard
376 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
378 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
380 Just select the manual you want to read from the
387 \begin_layout Section
388 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
392 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
399 \begin_layout Standard
400 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
401 can be configured via the menu
403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
407 \begin_inset Index idx
410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
417 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
419 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
420 packages are available.
421 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
423 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
425 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
430 \begin_inset space \space{}
433 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
436 To force \SpecialChar LyX
437 to re-inspect your system, you should use
439 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
443 \begin_inset Index idx
446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
447 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
453 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
454 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
457 \begin_layout Section
460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
462 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
471 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 installed, but you will not be
473 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
474 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
475 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
476 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
477 document can always be output as plain text
481 \begin_layout Standard
482 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
483 or DocBook classes or packages.
484 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
485 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
488 \begin_layout Standard
489 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
491 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
494 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
502 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
503 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
510 \begin_inset Index idx
513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
514 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
522 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
529 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 \begin_layout Chapter
534 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
538 \begin_layout Section
539 Basic File Operations
540 \begin_inset Index idx
543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
552 \begin_layout Standard
557 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
558 in addition to some more advanced operations:
561 \begin_layout Itemize
583 \begin_layout Itemize
599 arg "buffer-new-template"
605 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
639 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
653 \begin_layout Itemize
665 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
669 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
679 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Itemize
713 arg "buffer-write-as"
717 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
721 \begin_layout Itemize
723 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
739 \begin_layout Itemize
753 \begin_layout Itemize
767 \begin_layout Standard
768 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
769 a few minor differences.
772 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
783 command lists the available templates.
784 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
785 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
786 and possibly propose text fragments
788 for the document, features
789 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
792 you would otherwise need to
793 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
795 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
803 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
811 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
817 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
818 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
822 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
830 \begin_layout Standard
831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
863 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
864 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
865 is just that — a big, blank space.
873 \begin_layout Standard
894 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
902 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
920 will reload the document from disk.
921 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
922 and want to restore it to the last save.
931 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
932 them as your changes.
935 \begin_layout Section
936 Basic Editing Features
937 \begin_inset Index idx
940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
949 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
956 \begin_layout Standard
957 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
958 can perform cut and paste operations
959 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
960 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
961 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
962 editing features and how to access
964 We will start with cut and paste.
967 \begin_layout Standard
968 As you might expect, the
972 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
973 various other editing features.
974 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
978 \begin_layout Itemize
984 \begin_inset Index idx
987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1016 \begin_layout Itemize
1022 \begin_inset Index idx
1025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1054 \begin_layout Itemize
1060 \begin_inset Index idx
1063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1088 \begin_layout Itemize
1092 \begin_inset space ~
1098 \begin_layout Itemize
1102 \begin_inset space ~
1108 \begin_layout Itemize
1112 \begin_inset space ~
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1122 \begin_inset Index idx
1125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1134 \begin_inset Index idx
1137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1152 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1162 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1168 \begin_layout Standard
1169 The first three are self-explanatory.
1170 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1171 and other programs by
1192 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1193 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1198 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1199 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1200 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1201 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1202 into individual cells.
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1211 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1212 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1216 \begin_layout Standard
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1225 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1227 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1242 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1243 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1244 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1250 \begin_inset space \space{}
1253 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1254 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1260 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1270 \begin_inset space ~
1279 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1280 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1282 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1291 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1292 start a new paragraph.
1293 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1294 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1302 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1308 \begin_inset space ~
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1319 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1322 paste from the primary selection.
1323 This is normally the currently selected text.
1326 \begin_layout Standard
1329 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1331 \begin_inset space ~
1335 \begin_inset space ~
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1347 \begin_inset space ~
1353 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1359 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1362 \begin_inset space ~
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1376 button to skip the current word.
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1385 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1389 \begin_inset space ~
1394 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1396 If the toggle is set, searching for
1397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 will not match the word
1409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1423 Match whole words only
1425 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1426 to only find complete words, e.
1427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1456 offers also an advanced
1459 \begin_inset space ~
1463 \begin_inset space ~
1468 feature that is described in section
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1475 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1482 \begin_layout Standard
1483 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1484 \begin_inset space \space{}
1488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1496 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1498 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1503 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1510 \begin_layout Standard
1514 arg "inset-select-all"
1517 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1518 When the cursor is inside an inset
1521 arg "inset-select-all"
1524 selects the content of the inset.
1528 arg "inset-select-all"
1531 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1536 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1539 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1543 \begin_layout Section
1545 \begin_inset Index idx
1548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1555 \begin_inset Index idx
1558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1567 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1574 \begin_layout Standard
1575 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1577 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1580 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1583 or the toolbar button
1589 to undo some mistake.
1590 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1592 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1595 or the toolbar button
1602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1609 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1613 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1616 \begin_layout Standard
1617 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1626 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1627 This is a consequence of the 100
1628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1631 step undo limit mentioned above.
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1643 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1645 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1649 \begin_layout Section
1651 \begin_inset Index idx
1654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1663 \begin_layout Standard
1664 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1667 \begin_layout Enumerate
1672 \begin_layout Itemize
1677 once anywhere in the edit window.
1678 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1682 \begin_layout Enumerate
1687 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1697 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1700 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1701 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1704 \begin_layout Itemize
1705 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_layout Enumerate
1716 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1720 \begin_layout Standard
1721 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1722 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1726 \begin_layout Section
1728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1730 name "sec:Navigating"
1735 \begin_inset Index idx
1738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 \begin_layout Standard
1749 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1752 \begin_layout Itemize
1757 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1758 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1761 \begin_layout Itemize
1762 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1764 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1766 \begin_inset space ~
1771 or by the toolbar button
1774 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1780 \begin_layout Itemize
1781 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1783 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1786 and use the same menu to return to them.
1787 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1794 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1799 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1800 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1802 \begin_inset space ~
1807 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1808 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1809 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1810 your last editing position.
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1818 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1822 \begin_layout Subsection
1824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1826 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1831 \begin_inset Index idx
1834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1835 Navigating ! Outline
1841 \begin_inset Index idx
1844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1853 \begin_layout Standard
1854 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1855 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1856 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1864 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1868 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1869 \begin_inset space ~
1873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1875 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1880 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1884 \begin_layout Standard
1885 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1886 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1887 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1888 dialog and to modify the citation.
1891 \begin_layout Standard
1896 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1897 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1899 Labels and References
1901 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1910 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1913 \begin_layout Standard
1914 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1915 you further to control the display.
1920 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1921 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1927 option keeps it in the current view state.
1928 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1932 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1933 \begin_inset space ~
1936 3, the subsections of sections
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1940 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1945 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1946 \begin_inset space ~
1950 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1960 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1963 \begin_layout Standard
1970 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1971 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1985 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1986 So, for example, you can move section
1987 \begin_inset space ~
1991 \begin_inset space ~
1994 2.4 or after section
1995 \begin_inset space ~
2000 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2013 (or the corresponding key bindings
2021 ) you can change the level of sections.
2022 So you can for example make section
2023 \begin_inset space ~
2027 \begin_inset space ~
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2037 \begin_layout Standard
2038 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2039 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2042 \begin_layout Subsection
2043 Horizontal Scrolling
2044 \begin_inset Index idx
2047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2048 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2056 \begin_layout Standard
2058 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2064 \begin_inset space \space{}
2068 \begin_inset space ~
2071 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2072 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2073 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2078 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2082 \begin_layout Itemize
2084 is used on a small tablet computer
2087 \begin_layout Itemize
2088 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2100 \begin_inset space ~
2113 \begin_layout Itemize
2114 Math constructs with long command names
2117 \begin_layout Standard
2118 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2119 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2121 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2122 windows so that table
2123 \begin_inset space ~
2127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2129 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2134 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2136 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2137 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2140 \begin_layout Standard
2141 \begin_inset Float table
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2149 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2154 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2158 Horizontal scrolling test.
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_inset Tabular
2169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2170 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2215 \begin_layout Section
2216 Input/Word Completion
2217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2219 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2224 \begin_inset Index idx
2227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2234 \begin_inset Index idx
2237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2268 \begin_layout Standard
2270 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2272 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2273 is used to propose completions.
2276 \begin_layout Standard
2277 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2280 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2285 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2292 \begin_inset space ~
2296 \begin_inset space ~
2301 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2305 \begin_inset space ~
2310 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2311 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2315 \begin_inset space ~
2321 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2322 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2323 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2324 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2327 \begin_layout Standard
2329 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2330 completions available.
2335 key to accept a proposed completion.
2336 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2337 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2338 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2345 \begin_layout Standard
2346 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2347 ing options for text.
2349 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2351 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2353 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2356 he special math option
2360 enables characters to be composed.
2361 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2362 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2365 , you can then input the characters
2366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2377 to a formula to get it.
2378 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2379 of the math toolbar.
2380 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2384 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2385 's installation folder.
2387 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2388 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2395 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2400 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2401 In the example above,
2406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2438 \begin_layout Section
2440 \begin_inset Index idx
2443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2450 \begin_inset Index idx
2453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2482 \begin_inset Index idx
2485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2516 \begin_layout Standard
2517 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2531 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2534 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2538 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2539 \begin_inset space ~
2543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2545 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2564 \begin_inset space ~
2585 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2589 \begin_layout Labeling
2590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2594 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2595 LatexCommand nomenclature
2597 description "Tabulator key"
2604 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2606 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2607 \begin_inset space ~
2611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2613 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2620 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2624 , especially section
2625 \begin_inset space ~
2629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2631 reference "subsec:Lists"
2637 If you are still confused, look in the
2642 \begin_inset Newline newline
2650 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2651 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2655 \begin_layout Labeling
2656 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2660 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2661 LatexCommand nomenclature
2663 description "Escape key"
2671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2678 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2679 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2682 \begin_layout Labeling
2683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2689 \begin_inset space ~
2693 \begin_inset space ~
2700 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2701 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2705 \begin_layout Standard
2706 There are three modifier keys:
2709 \begin_layout Labeling
2710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2728 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2729 LatexCommand nomenclature
2731 description "Control key"
2736 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2737 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2741 \begin_layout Itemize
2750 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2753 \begin_layout Itemize
2762 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2765 \begin_layout Itemize
2774 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2778 \begin_layout Labeling
2779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2797 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2798 LatexCommand nomenclature
2800 description "Shift key"
2805 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2806 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2809 \begin_layout Labeling
2810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2828 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2829 LatexCommand nomenclature
2831 description "Alt or Meta key"
2836 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2837 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2838 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2844 \begin_inset Newline newline
2847 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2849 menu accelerator keys
2852 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2853 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2857 \begin_layout Standard
2858 For example, the sequence
2859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2865 \begin_inset space ~
2869 \begin_inset space ~
2875 \begin_inset space ~
2883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2902 \begin_inset space ~
2908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2918 \begin_layout Standard
2923 manual lists all other things bound to the
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2934 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2935 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2936 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2937 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2938 The \SpecialChar LyX
2939 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2940 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2941 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2943 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2959 followed by a capital
2966 \begin_layout Chapter
2969 \begin_inset Index idx
2972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2982 \begin_layout Section
2984 \begin_inset Index idx
2987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2996 \begin_layout Subsection
3000 \begin_layout Standard
3001 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3002 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3003 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3004 numbering schemes, and so on.
3005 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3006 and format the title of your document differently.
3009 \begin_layout Standard
3014 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3015 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3016 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3017 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3018 picks one for you by default.
3019 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3022 \begin_layout Subsection
3024 \begin_inset Index idx
3027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3036 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 You can select a class using the
3046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3047 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3051 \begin_inset Index idx
3054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3061 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3069 \begin_layout Standard
3070 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3075 \begin_layout Description
3076 Article for basic articles
3079 \begin_layout Description
3080 Report for basic reports
3083 \begin_layout Description
3084 Book for writing a book
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Letter for US-style letters
3091 \begin_layout Standard
3092 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3093 only uses if you have installed
3094 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3095 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3096 distributions will include
3098 Here are some of the classes.
3099 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3101 Special Document Classes
3110 \begin_layout Description
3111 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3114 \begin_layout Description
3115 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3119 \begin_layout Description
3120 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3124 \begin_layout Description
3125 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3126 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3127 There are three article layouts available.
3128 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3129 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3130 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3131 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3136 sequential numbering
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3140 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3141 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3142 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3143 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3146 \begin_layout Description
3147 Beamer Layout for presentations
3150 \begin_layout Description
3151 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3152 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3153 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3154 with \SpecialChar LyX
3158 \begin_layout Description
3159 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3162 \begin_layout Description
3164 \begin_inset space ~
3167 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3170 \begin_layout Description
3171 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3174 \begin_layout Description
3175 Foils Used to make transparencies
3178 \begin_layout Description
3179 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3180 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3181 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3182 with \SpecialChar LyX
3186 \begin_layout Description
3187 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3188 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3191 \begin_layout Description
3192 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3195 \begin_layout Description
3196 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3199 \begin_layout Description
3200 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3201 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3202 (Is used by this document.)
3205 \begin_layout Description
3206 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3209 \begin_layout Description
3210 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3213 \begin_layout Description
3218 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3219 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3221 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3225 \begin_layout Description
3226 Slides Used to make transparencies
3229 \begin_layout Description
3231 \begin_inset space ~
3234 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3235 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3238 \begin_layout Description
3239 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3242 \begin_layout Standard
3243 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3245 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3247 Special Document Classes
3254 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3255 of the document classes.
3258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3266 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3268 \begin_inset Index idx
3271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3288 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3289 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3291 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3294 \begin_layout Standard
3297 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3302 , are highly specialized.
3304 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3305 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3306 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3307 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3308 by some document class.
3309 There are just too many of them.
3310 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3322 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3323 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3324 document class for a new file.
3326 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3329 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3336 manual for information on how to install them.
3337 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3343 \begin_layout Standard
3344 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3345 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3346 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3347 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3348 class files to be used for dissertation
3349 s submitted to those universities.
3350 The \SpecialChar LyX
3351 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3353 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3357 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3363 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3370 name "subsec:Modules"
3375 \begin_inset Index idx
3378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3387 \begin_layout Standard
3388 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3389 chosen document class.
3390 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3391 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3402 \begin_inset Index idx
3405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3412 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3416 \begin_layout Standard
3417 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3418 packages or file format converters that are not always
3419 installed by default.
3421 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3422 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3423 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3424 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3426 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3427 file without the missing prerequisites.
3428 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3429 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3432 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3436 \begin_inset Index idx
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3446 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3451 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3454 \begin_layout Standard
3455 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3463 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3465 will advise you about these things.
3473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3477 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3482 \begin_inset Index idx
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3486 Document ! Local Layout
3494 \begin_layout Standard
3495 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3496 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3497 : They are intended to be used in
3498 a variety of different documents.
3499 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3500 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3501 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3502 need a specific inset or
3503 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3505 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3508 style only that one time.
3509 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3511 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3529 manual for information on how to use it.
3532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3536 \begin_layout Standard
3537 Each class has a default set of options.
3538 Here's a quick table describing them:
3541 \begin_layout Standard
3542 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3548 \begin_layout Standard
3550 \begin_inset Tabular
3551 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3552 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3553 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4011 \begin_layout Standard
4012 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4018 \begin_layout Standard
4019 You're probably also wondering what
4020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4024 \begin_inset space ~
4028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4032 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4033 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4038 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4043 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4053 headings, there are also
4061 headings, and so on.
4062 We will describe these headings fully in section
4063 \begin_inset space ~
4067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4069 reference "subsec:Headings"
4076 \begin_layout Subsection
4078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4080 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4085 \begin_inset Index idx
4088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4095 \begin_inset Index idx
4098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4107 \begin_layout Standard
4108 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4117 \begin_inset space ~
4125 \begin_inset space ~
4130 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4132 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4133 doesn't support special options you want to
4134 use for your document.
4135 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4136 -class and its options, you have to read
4140 \begin_layout Standard
4144 \begin_inset space ~
4151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4157 \begin_inset space ~
4162 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4163 You can choose between the following five options:
4166 \begin_layout Labeling
4167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4172 Use default page style of current class.
4175 \begin_layout Labeling
4176 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4181 No page numbers or headings.
4184 \begin_layout Labeling
4185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4193 \begin_layout Labeling
4194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4199 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4200 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4201 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4202 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4205 \begin_layout Labeling
4206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4211 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4212 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4218 \begin_inset Index idx
4221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4229 How they are defined is explained in section
4230 \begin_inset space ~
4234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4236 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4243 \begin_layout Standard
4244 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4245 \begin_inset space ~
4249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4251 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4258 \begin_layout Subsection
4259 Paper Size and Orientation
4260 \begin_inset Index idx
4263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4264 Document ! Paper size
4270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4272 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4279 \begin_layout Standard
4280 You can find the following options in the menu
4283 \begin_inset space ~
4290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4294 \begin_inset Index idx
4297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 \begin_layout Labeling
4307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4311 \begin_inset space ~
4316 What size paper to print on.
4321 \begin_layout Itemize
4327 \begin_layout Itemize
4333 \begin_layout Itemize
4339 \begin_layout Itemize
4345 \begin_layout Itemize
4348 US letter, US legal, US executive
4351 \begin_layout Itemize
4357 \begin_layout Itemize
4364 \begin_layout Labeling
4365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4370 To choose whether to output as
4381 \begin_layout Labeling
4382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4386 \begin_inset space ~
4391 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4392 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4395 \begin_layout Subsection
4397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4399 name "subsec:Margins"
4404 \begin_inset Index idx
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 \begin_inset Index idx
4417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4426 \begin_layout Standard
4427 Paper margins are set in the menu
4429 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4446 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4447 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4448 the paper format and the font size into account.
4451 \begin_layout Subsection
4455 \begin_layout Standard
4456 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4462 That includes the paragraph environments.
4463 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4464 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4465 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4467 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4476 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4478 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4479 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4480 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4483 \begin_layout Section
4484 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4485 \begin_inset Index idx
4488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4489 Paragraph ! Indentation
4497 \begin_layout Subsection
4499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4501 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4508 \begin_layout Standard
4509 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4510 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4515 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4516 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4517 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4521 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4527 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4528 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4529 language than English.
4531 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4534 \begin_layout Standard
4535 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4536 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4537 into \SpecialChar LyX
4539 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4542 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4544 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4545 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4546 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4553 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4554 goes to produce a printable file.
4559 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4561 gives you the ability globally to change
4565 these pre-coded spacings.
4566 We will explain more later.
4569 \begin_layout Subsection
4570 Paragraph Separation
4571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4573 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4578 \begin_inset Index idx
4581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4582 Paragraph ! Separation
4590 \begin_layout Standard
4598 \begin_inset space ~
4606 \begin_inset space ~
4613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4617 \begin_inset Index idx
4620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4626 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4629 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_layout Standard
4634 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4637 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4639 \begin_inset space ~
4644 dialog and toggle the
4647 \begin_inset space ~
4652 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4655 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4659 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4660 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4664 \begin_layout Standard
4665 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4666 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4669 \begin_layout Subsection
4671 \begin_inset Index idx
4674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4675 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4683 \begin_layout Standard
4686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4690 \begin_inset Index idx
4693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4702 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4706 \begin_inset space ~
4715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4716 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4722 \begin_inset Index idx
4725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4732 installed to use this feature.
4737 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4739 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4741 \begin_inset space ~
4746 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4747 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4750 \begin_layout Section
4751 Paragraph Environments
4752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4754 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4759 \begin_inset Index idx
4762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4763 Paragraph ! Environments
4769 \begin_inset Index idx
4772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4773 Paragraph environments|(
4781 \begin_layout Subsection
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4786 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4789 \begin_layout Standard
4798 } \SpecialChar ldots
4808 \begin_inset Newline newline
4811 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4813 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4814 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4815 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4824 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 A paragraph environment is simply a
4829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4836 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4837 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4838 scheme, labels, and so on.
4839 Additionally, you can
4840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4847 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4848 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4849 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4850 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4852 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4854 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4857 \begin_layout Standard
4858 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4859 \begin_inset Graphics
4860 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4866 at the left end of the toolbar.
4868 will change the environment of the
4872 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4873 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4874 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4878 \begin_layout Standard
4887 create a new paragraph using the
4891 paragraph environment.
4893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4900 because if you are in one of these environments:
4903 \begin_layout Itemize
4909 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4939 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4947 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4951 , rather than resetting it to
4956 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4957 \begin_inset space ~
4961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4963 reference "sec:Nesting"
4970 \begin_layout Subsection
4974 \begin_layout Standard
4975 The default paragraph environment is
4980 It creates a plain paragraph.
4982 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4983 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4984 this manual) are in the
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4992 You can nest a paragraph using the
4996 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5004 \begin_layout Subsection
5006 \begin_inset Index idx
5009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5018 \begin_layout Standard
5019 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5020 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5029 for thanks or contact information.
5030 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5031 places all of this on a separate page
5032 along with today's date.
5033 For other types of documents, the title
5034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5041 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5047 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5061 Here's how you use them:
5064 \begin_layout Itemize
5065 Put the title of your document in the
5072 \begin_layout Itemize
5073 Put the author name in the
5080 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5082 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5088 Note that using this environment is optional.
5089 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5090 will automatically insert today's date.
5091 If you don't want a date, use the option
5093 Suppress default date on front page
5097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5098 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5100 \begin_inset space ~
5108 \begin_layout Standard
5109 You can use footnotes to insert
5110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5117 or contact information.
5120 \begin_layout Subsection
5122 \begin_inset Index idx
5125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5134 name "subsec:Headings"
5141 \begin_layout Standard
5142 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5144 takes care of the numbering for you.
5147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5149 \begin_inset Index idx
5152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5153 Section headings ! Numbered
5161 \begin_layout Standard
5162 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5166 \begin_layout Enumerate
5172 \begin_layout Enumerate
5178 \begin_layout Enumerate
5184 \begin_layout Enumerate
5190 \begin_layout Enumerate
5196 \begin_layout Enumerate
5202 \begin_layout Enumerate
5208 \begin_layout Standard
5210 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5211 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5212 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5217 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5218 You group the book into chapters.
5220 does a similar grouping:
5223 \begin_layout Itemize
5228 is divided into either
5239 \begin_layout Itemize
5251 \begin_layout Itemize
5263 \begin_layout Itemize
5275 \begin_layout Itemize
5287 \begin_layout Itemize
5299 \begin_layout Standard
5300 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5308 Not all document types use the
5312 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5317 is the top-level heading.
5325 \begin_layout Standard
5330 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5331 labels it with its number,
5332 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5334 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5348 \begin_inset Index idx
5351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5352 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 The unnumbered section headings have a
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5369 at the end of their name.
5370 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5371 the table of contents, see section
5372 \begin_inset space ~
5376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5386 Changing the Numbering
5387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5389 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5396 \begin_layout Standard
5397 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5398 in the Table of Contents.
5399 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5401 Just as certain classes start with
5415 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5425 This is something you can change.
5428 \begin_layout Standard
5431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5435 \begin_inset Index idx
5438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset space ~
5451 \begin_inset space ~
5456 you will see two counters.
5461 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5462 numbers a section heading.
5463 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5468 Short Titles of Headings
5469 \begin_inset Index idx
5472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5473 Section headings ! Short titles
5479 \begin_inset Argument 1
5482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5491 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5498 \begin_layout Standard
5499 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5500 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5501 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5502 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5505 \begin_layout Standard
5507 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5508 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5509 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5510 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5515 \begin_inset space ~
5521 This will insert a box labeled
5522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5526 \begin_inset space ~
5530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5533 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5534 This also works for captions inside floats.
5535 There can only be one short title per title.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5546 \begin_layout Standard
5547 The following information applies to all section headings:
5550 \begin_layout Itemize
5551 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5554 \begin_layout Itemize
5555 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5558 \begin_layout Itemize
5559 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5562 \begin_layout Itemize
5563 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5566 \begin_layout Subsection
5570 \begin_layout Standard
5572 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5586 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5587 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5588 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5589 the text they contain.
5590 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5598 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5601 \begin_layout Standard
5602 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5611 when you start a new paragraph.
5612 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5616 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5617 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5618 have to change back to the
5622 environment yourself.
5625 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_inset Index idx
5637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5646 \begin_layout Standard
5647 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5648 time for the differences.
5657 are identical except for one difference:
5661 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5670 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5673 \begin_layout Standard
5674 Here's an example of the
5687 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5689 See – no indentation!
5693 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5694 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5695 the other paragraph.
5698 \begin_layout Standard
5699 Here's another example, this time in the
5706 \begin_layout Quotation
5712 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5713 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5714 the first line, then
5718 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5722 you were quoting other text.
5725 \begin_layout Quotation
5726 Here's a new paragraph.
5727 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5728 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5731 \begin_layout Standard
5732 As the examples show,
5736 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5737 They should put quotes in the
5742 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5746 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5751 \begin_inset Index idx
5754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5761 \begin_inset Index idx
5764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5780 \begin_layout Standard
5785 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5791 \begin_inset Newline newline
5794 Which I did not rehearse!
5798 It could be much worse.
5799 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5801 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5802 indented a bit more than the first.
5803 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5809 \begin_inset Newline newline
5812 And make things look fine
5813 \begin_inset Newline newline
5819 arg "newline-insert newline"
5825 \begin_layout Standard
5830 does not indent both margins.
5831 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5832 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5835 arg "newline-insert newline"
5841 \begin_layout Subsection
5843 \begin_inset Index idx
5846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5862 \begin_layout Standard
5864 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5874 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5875 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5884 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5885 lets you provide your own label.
5886 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5887 describing some general features of all four of them.
5890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5894 \begin_layout Standard
5895 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5897 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5898 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5907 reset the environment to
5911 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5912 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5913 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5917 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5921 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5928 \begin_layout Standard
5929 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5930 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5931 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5933 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5934 you read all of section
5935 \begin_inset space ~
5939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5941 reference "sec:Nesting"
5948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5950 \begin_inset Index idx
5953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5969 \begin_layout Standard
5970 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5974 paragraph environment.
5975 It has the following properties:
5978 \begin_layout Itemize
5979 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5983 \begin_layout Itemize
5985 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5988 \begin_layout Itemize
5989 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5993 \begin_layout Itemize
5994 The items can have any length.
5996 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5997 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6004 \begin_layout Itemize
6009 environment inside another
6013 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6017 \begin_layout Itemize
6018 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6021 \begin_layout Itemize
6023 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6026 \begin_layout Itemize
6028 \begin_inset space ~
6032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6034 reference "sec:Nesting"
6038 for a full explanation of nesting.
6042 \begin_layout Standard
6043 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6052 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6055 \begin_layout Standard
6056 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6057 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6060 \begin_layout Itemize
6061 The label for the first level
6065 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6069 \begin_layout Itemize
6070 The label for the second level is a dash.
6074 \begin_layout Itemize
6075 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6079 \begin_layout Itemize
6080 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6084 \begin_layout Itemize
6085 Back out to the third level.
6089 \begin_layout Itemize
6090 Back to the second level.
6094 \begin_layout Itemize
6095 Back to the outermost level.
6098 \begin_layout Standard
6099 These are the default labels for an
6104 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6109 dialog in the submenu
6114 \begin_inset Index idx
6117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6123 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6127 \begin_layout Standard
6128 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6129 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6137 reference "sec:Nesting"
6144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6146 \begin_inset Index idx
6149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6158 name "sec:Enumerate"
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6170 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6171 It has these properties:
6174 \begin_layout Enumerate
6175 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6179 \begin_layout Enumerate
6180 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6184 \begin_layout Enumerate
6186 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6189 \begin_layout Enumerate
6194 environment resets the counter to one.
6197 \begin_layout Enumerate
6210 \begin_layout Enumerate
6211 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6212 Items can have any length.
6215 \begin_layout Enumerate
6216 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6219 \begin_layout Enumerate
6220 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6223 \begin_layout Enumerate
6224 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6228 \begin_layout Standard
6237 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6239 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6240 labels the four different levels in an
6247 \begin_layout Enumerate
6248 The first level of an
6252 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6256 \begin_layout Enumerate
6257 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6261 \begin_layout Enumerate
6262 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6266 \begin_layout Enumerate
6267 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6270 \begin_layout Enumerate
6271 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6276 \begin_layout Enumerate
6277 Back to the third level
6281 \begin_layout Enumerate
6282 Back to the second level.
6286 \begin_layout Enumerate
6287 Back to the outermost level.
6290 \begin_layout Standard
6291 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6295 environment, see section
6296 \begin_inset space ~
6300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6302 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6307 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6311 \begin_layout Standard
6312 There is more to nesting
6316 environments than we've stated here.
6317 You should read section
6318 \begin_inset space ~
6322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6324 reference "sec:Nesting"
6328 to learn more about nesting.
6331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6333 \begin_inset Index idx
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6346 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6350 list has no fixed label.
6351 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6360 of the first line as the label.
6364 \begin_layout Description
6365 Example: This is an example of the
6372 \begin_layout Standard
6374 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6378 \begin_layout Standard
6380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6387 it is meant that the first usage of the
6391 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6393 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6401 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6407 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6409 \begin_inset space ~
6415 \begin_inset space ~
6419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6421 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6425 for more information.) Here is an example:
6428 \begin_layout Description
6430 \begin_inset space ~
6433 Example: This one shows how to use a
6436 \begin_inset space ~
6448 \begin_layout Description
6449 Usage: You should use the
6453 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6454 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6456 It's not a good idea to use a
6460 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6461 You're better off using
6473 paragraphs into them.
6476 \begin_layout Description
6477 Nesting: You can nest
6481 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6485 \begin_layout Standard
6486 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6487 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6488 them from the first line.
6491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6493 \begin_inset Index idx
6496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6505 \begin_layout Standard
6510 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6511 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6515 \begin_layout Standard
6524 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6526 Here are its properties:
6529 \begin_layout Labeling
6530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6532 \begin_inset space ~
6535 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6544 of each line as the item label.
6549 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6550 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6551 space as described above.
6554 \begin_layout Labeling
6555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6556 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6557 uses different margins for the item label and the
6558 body of the item text.
6559 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6560 label width plus a little extra space.
6564 \begin_layout Labeling
6565 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6567 \begin_inset space ~
6570 width \SpecialChar LyX
6571 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6572 If the label width is larger, the label
6573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6580 into the first line.
6581 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6582 margin of the rest of the item text.
6585 \begin_layout Labeling
6586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6588 \begin_inset space ~
6591 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6596 environment has the same left margin.
6597 \begin_inset Newline newline
6600 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6605 \begin_inset space ~
6610 dialog (toolbar button
6613 arg "layout-paragraph"
6620 \begin_inset space ~
6625 determines the default label width.
6626 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6635 multiple times instead.
6636 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6646 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6649 \begin_inset space ~
6654 every time you alter a label in a
6659 \begin_inset Newline newline
6662 The predefined default width is the length of
6663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6671 \begin_inset space ~
6677 \begin_layout Standard
6682 list the same way as the
6686 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6692 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6696 \begin_layout Standard
6701 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6702 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6704 \begin_inset space ~
6708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6710 reference "sec:Nesting"
6714 to learn about nesting.
6717 \begin_layout Standard
6718 There is yet another feature of the
6722 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6723 left-justifies the item labels by
6725 You can use additional
6729 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6730 justifies the item label.
6735 are documented in section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6747 Here are some examples:
6750 \begin_layout Labeling
6751 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6752 Left The default for
6759 \begin_layout Labeling
6760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6761 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6768 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6771 \begin_layout Labeling
6772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6773 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6777 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6784 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6787 \begin_layout Subsection
6789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6791 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6796 \begin_inset Index idx
6799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6809 The features described in this section require that the module
6811 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6813 is loaded in the document settings.
6814 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6820 \begin_inset Index idx
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6834 Custom Enumerate Lists
6835 \begin_inset Index idx
6838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6849 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6855 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6856 There you add the command
6859 \begin_layout Standard
6867 \begin_layout Standard
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6881 Code, look at section
6882 \begin_inset space ~
6886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6888 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6901 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6908 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6909 For capital Roman numerals replace
6921 in the command above.
6922 For Arabic numerals use
6930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6937 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6952 \begin_layout Standard
6954 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6962 You can only number 26
6963 \begin_inset space ~
6966 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6975 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6976 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6980 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6983 \begin_layout Enumerate
6984 \begin_inset Argument 1
6987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7013 \begin_layout Enumerate
7014 \begin_inset Argument 1
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 \begin_layout Enumerate
7045 \begin_layout Enumerate
7046 \begin_inset Argument 1
7049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_layout Enumerate
7074 \begin_inset Argument 1
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 For this list these commands were used:
7107 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_inset Newline newline
7126 \begin_inset Newline newline
7134 \begin_inset Newline newline
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7151 makes the label emphasized and
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7170 lists until you change the definition.
7178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7180 \begin_inset Index idx
7183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7196 \begin_layout Enumerate
7197 \begin_inset Argument 1
7200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7219 \begin_inset Note Note
7222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 goes back to default numbering
7231 \begin_layout Enumerate
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7239 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7243 \begin_layout Standard
7244 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7249 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7250 to indicate that it is a resumed
7251 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7252 , but in the output.
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7264 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7273 \begin_layout Standard
7274 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7276 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7277 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7278 of a normal enumeration.
7279 There, insert the command
7282 \begin_layout Standard
7288 \begin_layout Standard
7293 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7301 \begin_layout Enumerate
7305 \begin_layout Standard
7306 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7309 \begin_layout Enumerate
7310 \begin_inset Argument 1
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 This enumeration starts at 4
7332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7334 \begin_inset Index idx
7337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7347 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7349 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7352 \begin_layout Itemize
7356 \begin_layout Itemize
7357 with standard spacing
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7363 Add there the command
7367 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7370 \begin_layout Itemize
7371 \begin_inset Argument 1
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Itemize
7397 \begin_layout Itemize
7401 \begin_layout Standard
7402 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7409 \begin_inset Index idx
7412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7420 For more information see its documentation,
7421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7431 \begin_layout Standard
7432 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7434 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7435 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7439 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7442 \begin_layout Enumerate
7443 \begin_inset Argument 1
7446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7454 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7467 \begin_layout Enumerate
7468 with negative indentation
7471 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7472 Further Customization
7473 \begin_inset Index idx
7476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7477 Lists ! Customization
7485 \begin_layout Standard
7486 You can also change the style of description lists.
7490 \begin_layout Standard
7496 \begin_layout Standard
7497 changes the description label font, the command
7500 \begin_layout Standard
7506 \begin_layout Standard
7507 sets the list style.
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 An example where the command
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7519 itshape, style=nextline
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7526 \begin_layout Description
7528 \begin_inset space ~
7532 \begin_inset Argument 1
7535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7541 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7543 itshape, style=nextline
7553 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7554 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7558 \begin_layout Description
7560 \begin_inset space ~
7563 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7564 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7565 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7569 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7575 \begin_inset Index idx
7578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7586 For more information see its documentation
7587 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7597 \begin_layout Subsection
7599 \begin_inset Index idx
7602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7613 \begin_inset space ~
7616 Address: An Overview
7619 \begin_layout Standard
7620 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7621 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7629 \begin_inset space ~
7635 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7636 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7637 gags on the document.
7638 In contrast, you can use the
7645 \begin_inset space ~
7650 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7651 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7655 \begin_layout Standard
7656 Of course, you're not limited to using
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7672 \begin_inset space ~
7677 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7678 some European academic papers.
7681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7685 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7697 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7698 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7702 \begin_inset space ~
7707 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7708 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7709 Here's an example of each:
7712 \begin_layout Right Address
7714 \begin_inset Newline newline
7718 \begin_inset Newline newline
7722 \begin_inset Newline newline
7725 When is it? What is today?
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7732 \begin_inset space ~
7738 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7740 the largest block of text on a single line.
7741 Here's an example of the
7748 \begin_layout Address
7750 \begin_inset Newline newline
7753 Where do I send this
7754 \begin_inset Newline newline
7757 Your post office and country
7760 \begin_layout Standard
7761 As you can see, both
7768 \begin_inset space ~
7773 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7778 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7779 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7785 This makes sense, since
7793 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7794 Thus, you have to use
7801 arg "newline-insert newline"
7806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7807 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7809 \begin_inset space ~
7813 \begin_inset space ~
7818 ) to start a new line in an
7825 \begin_inset space ~
7833 \begin_layout Subsection
7837 \begin_layout Standard
7838 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7839 or list of references.
7841 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7846 \begin_inset Index idx
7849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 \begin_layout Standard
7863 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7864 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7865 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7866 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7880 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7881 The book document classes ignores the
7885 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7889 in a letter document class.
7892 \begin_layout Standard
7897 environment does several things for you.
7898 First, it puts the centered label
7899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7907 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7909 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7910 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7911 the subsequent text.
7912 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7914 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7923 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7924 The new paragraph will still be in the
7929 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7930 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7933 \begin_layout Standard
7934 \begin_inset Float figure
7941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7943 \begin_inset Graphics
7944 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7952 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7957 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7978 \begin_layout Standard
7979 We would love to demonstrate the
7983 environment, but since this document is in the
7984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7991 class, we can't do this.
7992 We inserted it therefore as figure
7993 \begin_inset space ~
7997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7999 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8004 If you have never heard of an
8005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8012 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8015 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8017 \begin_inset Index idx
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8029 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8036 \begin_layout Standard
8041 environment is used to list references.
8042 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8043 only use it at the end of the document.
8055 \begin_layout Standard
8056 When you first open a
8060 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8061 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8077 depending on the document class.
8078 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8079 Each paragraph of the
8083 environment is a bibliography entry.
8088 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8089 Each new paragraph is still in the
8096 \begin_layout Standard
8097 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8098 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8100 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8102 handling, have a look at section
8103 \begin_inset space ~
8107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8109 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8116 \begin_layout Subsection
8117 Special Environments
8120 \begin_layout Standard
8122 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8123 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8131 \begin_inset Index idx
8134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8144 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8157 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8159 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8164 key as a fixed whitespace.
8168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8181 \begin_inset space ~
8186 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8204 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8207 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8210 arg "newline-insert newline"
8227 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8228 So, when you finish using the
8233 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8234 Also, you can nest the
8239 environment inside of others.
8242 \begin_layout Standard
8243 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8246 \begin_layout Itemize
8250 arg "newline-insert newline"
8253 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8258 \begin_inset space \space{}
8268 arg "newline-insert newline"
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8278 arg "newline-insert newline"
8288 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8294 \begin_layout Itemize
8295 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8296 You must put at least one
8300 in any line you want blank.
8301 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8305 \begin_layout Itemize
8306 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8310 since that will insert
8315 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8318 arg "self-insert \""
8324 \begin_layout Standard
8328 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8332 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8336 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8340 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8344 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8345 printf("Hello World!
8350 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8354 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8358 \begin_layout Standard
8359 This is just the standard
8360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8371 \begin_layout Standard
8377 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8379 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8380 as if you used a typewriter.
8381 \begin_inset Index idx
8384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8385 Paragraph environments|)
8390 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8393 Program Code Listings
8398 \begin_inset space ~
8406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8410 \begin_inset Index idx
8413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8422 \begin_layout Standard
8427 environment is similar to the
8432 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8433 computer console text.
8438 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8452 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8453 you can have empty lines.
8466 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 have a certain language and a text style
8470 \begin_layout Itemize
8471 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8472 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8473 and \SpecialChar TeX
8477 \begin_layout Standard
8478 Because of these properties
8482 works like a typewriter.
8486 \begin_layout Verbatim
8491 \begin_layout Verbatim
8495 The following 2 lines are empty:
8498 \begin_layout Verbatim
8502 \begin_layout Verbatim
8506 \begin_layout Verbatim
8508 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8518 environment is identical to
8522 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8523 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8530 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8535 \begin_layout Section
8536 Nesting Environments
8537 \begin_inset Index idx
8540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8541 Nesting ! Environments
8547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8556 \begin_layout Subsection
8560 \begin_layout Standard
8562 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8564 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8566 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8568 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8580 \begin_layout Enumerate
8584 \begin_layout Enumerate
8589 \begin_layout Enumerate
8593 \begin_layout Enumerate
8598 \begin_layout Enumerate
8602 \begin_layout Standard
8603 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8604 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8606 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8608 \begin_inset space ~
8612 \begin_inset space ~
8620 \begin_inset space ~
8624 \begin_inset space ~
8629 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8631 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8634 arg "depth-increment"
8640 arg "depth-decrement"
8654 arg "depth-increment"
8660 arg "depth-decrement"
8664 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8665 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8669 \begin_layout Standard
8670 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8671 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8672 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8673 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8674 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8677 \begin_layout Standard
8678 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8680 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8682 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8685 \begin_layout Subsection
8686 What You Can and Can't Nest
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8690 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8691 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8694 \begin_layout Standard
8695 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8696 than a simple yes or no.
8697 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 Completely unnestable
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8709 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8714 \begin_layout Standard
8715 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8716 environments have them:
8719 \begin_layout Description
8720 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8721 Can't nest into them.
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8756 \begin_layout Description
8758 \begin_inset space ~
8761 Nestable You can nest them.
8762 You can nest other things into them.
8766 \begin_layout Itemize
8772 \begin_layout Itemize
8778 \begin_layout Itemize
8784 \begin_layout Itemize
8790 \begin_layout Itemize
8796 \begin_layout Itemize
8802 \begin_layout Itemize
8808 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8828 \begin_layout Description
8829 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8830 You can't nest anything into them.
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Itemize
8852 \begin_layout Itemize
8858 \begin_layout Itemize
8864 \begin_layout Itemize
8870 \begin_layout Itemize
8876 \begin_layout Itemize
8882 \begin_layout Itemize
8888 \begin_layout Itemize
8894 \begin_layout Itemize
8900 \begin_layout Itemize
8906 \begin_layout Itemize
8912 \begin_layout Itemize
8916 \begin_inset space ~
8922 \begin_layout Itemize
8929 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8948 \begin_inset space ~
8951 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8952 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8953 nested section headings violate this.
8961 \begin_layout Subsection
8962 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8963 \begin_inset Index idx
8966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8967 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8976 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8977 affected by nesting anyhow.
8981 \begin_layout Itemize
8985 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 \begin_layout Itemize
8993 \begin_layout Standard
8995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9003 Figures and tables in
9007 are not affected by this.
9012 Have a look at section
9013 \begin_inset space ~
9017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9019 reference "sec:Floats"
9023 for more information about
9030 \begin_layout Standard
9032 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9033 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9037 \begin_layout Standard
9038 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9046 of its own, it behaves just like a
9047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9054 paragraph environment.
9055 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9059 \begin_layout Standard
9060 Here's an example with a table:
9063 \begin_layout Enumerate
9068 \begin_layout Enumerate
9069 This is (a) and it's nested.
9073 \begin_layout Standard
9074 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9080 \begin_layout Standard
9082 \begin_inset Tabular
9083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9171 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9180 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Standard
9189 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9192 \begin_layout Enumerate
9197 \begin_layout Enumerate
9198 This is (a) and it's nested.
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9209 \begin_layout Standard
9211 \begin_inset Tabular
9212 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9213 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9299 \begin_layout Standard
9300 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9306 \begin_layout Enumerate
9313 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9320 \begin_layout Standard
9321 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9325 \begin_layout Standard
9326 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9329 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9332 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 This is (a) and it's nested.
9341 \begin_layout Standard
9342 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9348 \begin_layout Standard
9350 \begin_inset Tabular
9351 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9352 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9439 \begin_layout Standard
9440 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9446 \begin_layout Enumerate
9448 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9455 \begin_layout Enumerate
9459 \begin_layout Standard
9460 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9466 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9467 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9471 \begin_layout Subsection
9472 Usage and General Features
9475 \begin_layout Standard
9476 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9477 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9486 is the innermost possible depth.
9487 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9490 \begin_layout Enumerate
9491 level #1 – outermost
9495 \begin_layout Enumerate
9500 \begin_layout Enumerate
9505 \begin_layout Enumerate
9510 \begin_layout Itemize
9515 \begin_layout Itemize
9524 \begin_layout Standard
9525 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9526 both of them in the example.
9527 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9537 For example, if we tried to nest another
9542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9549 , we would get errors.
9552 \begin_layout Subsection
9554 \begin_inset Index idx
9557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9566 \begin_layout Standard
9567 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9568 We have several examples of nested environments.
9569 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9573 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9574 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9577 \begin_layout Labeling
9578 \labelwidthstring MMM
9579 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9588 \begin_layout Labeling
9589 \labelwidthstring MMM
9590 #2-a This is level #2.
9591 We created it by using
9594 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9600 arg "depth-increment"
9607 \begin_layout Labeling
9608 \labelwidthstring MMM
9609 #3-a This is level #3.
9610 This time, we just enter
9617 arg "depth-increment"
9621 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9625 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9631 arg "depth-increment"
9638 \begin_layout Standard
9643 environment, nested inside of
9644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9652 So, it's at level #4.
9653 We did this by entering
9656 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9662 arg "depth-increment"
9665 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9670 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9686 \begin_layout Standard
9691 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9694 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9700 \begin_layout Labeling
9701 \labelwidthstring MMM
9702 #4-a This is level #4.
9706 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9709 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9714 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9718 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9723 keep nesting things inside
9724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9735 \begin_layout Labeling
9736 \labelwidthstring MMM
9737 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9742 \begin_layout Labeling
9743 \labelwidthstring MMM
9744 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9745 and this is level #6.
9746 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9750 \begin_layout Labeling
9751 \labelwidthstring MMM
9752 #5-b Back to level #5.
9756 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9762 arg "depth-decrement"
9769 \begin_layout Labeling
9770 \labelwidthstring MMM
9774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9780 arg "depth-decrement"
9783 , we're back at level #4.
9787 \begin_layout Labeling
9788 \labelwidthstring MMM
9789 #3-b Back to level #3.
9790 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9794 \begin_layout Labeling
9795 \labelwidthstring MMM
9796 #2-b Back to level #2.
9801 \begin_layout Labeling
9802 \labelwidthstring MMM
9803 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9804 After this sentence, we will enter
9808 and change the paragraph environment back to
9815 \begin_layout Standard
9816 We could have also used the
9832 environment in place of the
9837 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9841 Example 2: Inheritance
9844 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9845 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9848 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9857 arg "depth-increment"
9861 \begin_inset Newline newline
9864 which, we will change to the
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9877 environment, at level #2.
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 Notice how the nested
9885 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9889 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9893 \begin_layout Standard
9894 We ended this example by entering
9899 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9903 and reset the nesting depth by using
9906 arg "depth-decrement"
9912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9913 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9922 \begin_inset Argument 1
9925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9926 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9934 \begin_layout Enumerate
9935 This is level #1, in an
9939 paragraph environment.
9940 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9949 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9955 arg "depth-increment"
9959 Now, what happens if we nest an
9963 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9964 label be? An asterisk?
9968 \begin_layout Itemize
9978 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9979 So, its label is a bullet.
9980 (We got here by using
9983 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9989 arg "depth-increment"
9992 , then changing the environment to
10000 \begin_layout Itemize
10001 Here's level #4, produced using
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 arg "depth-increment"
10014 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10019 \begin_layout Enumerate
10021 to get to level #5.
10022 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10027 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10031 , because we are in the
10039 environment (that is, it is an
10054 \begin_layout Enumerate
10059 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10060 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10064 \begin_layout Enumerate
10065 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10068 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10071 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10074 \begin_layout Enumerate
10078 arg "depth-decrement"
10081 to decrease the depth after the next
10084 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10091 \begin_layout Enumerate
10093 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10098 \begin_layout Enumerate
10100 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10101 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10105 \begin_layout Enumerate
10106 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10115 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10120 reset the counter for the label.
10124 \begin_layout Enumerate
10128 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10134 arg "depth-decrement"
10137 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10138 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10139 into the twofold-nested
10147 \begin_layout Enumerate
10148 The same thing happens if we do another
10151 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10157 arg "depth-decrement"
10160 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10163 \begin_layout Standard
10164 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10169 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10180 The number of other
10184 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10191 The same rule applies for the
10195 environment, as well.
10198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10199 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10202 \begin_layout Enumerate
10203 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10204 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10205 the same detail with how we did it.
10214 \begin_layout Standard
10222 arg "depth-increment"
10229 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10230 the example in parentheses someplace.
10231 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10232 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10233 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10237 \begin_layout Enumerate
10242 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10246 \begin_layout Verse
10247 Now we will add verse.
10248 \begin_inset Newline newline
10251 It will get much worse.
10252 \begin_inset Newline newline
10262 arg "depth-increment"
10272 \begin_layout Verse
10273 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10274 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10278 \begin_inset Newline newline
10284 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10292 \begin_layout Verse
10293 Here comes a table:
10297 \begin_layout Standard
10298 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10304 \begin_layout Standard
10306 \begin_inset Tabular
10307 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10308 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10395 \begin_layout Verse
10399 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10409 arg "depth-increment"
10415 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10421 \begin_inset Newline newline
10429 arg "depth-decrement"
10436 \begin_layout Enumerate
10441 : level #1) This is another item.
10442 Note that selecting a
10446 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10447 3 times to put the table inside the
10455 \begin_layout Quotation
10456 We're now ending the
10460 list and changing to
10465 We're still at level #1.
10466 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10467 The next set of paragraphs is a
10468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10475 We will nest both the
10482 \begin_inset space ~
10487 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10491 for the letter body.
10495 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10498 to preserve the depth.
10499 Remember that you need to use
10502 arg "newline-insert newline"
10505 to create multiple lines inside the
10512 \begin_inset space ~
10522 \begin_layout Right Address
10524 \begin_inset Newline newline
10527 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10528 \begin_inset Newline newline
10534 \begin_layout Address
10536 \begin_inset space ~
10542 \begin_layout Quotation
10543 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10547 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10548 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10549 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10550 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10551 as soon as possible.
10552 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10555 \begin_layout Quotation
10556 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10557 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10558 with your order, along with payment.
10561 \begin_layout Quotation
10562 We thank you again for your patience.
10565 \begin_layout Address
10567 \begin_inset Newline newline
10574 \begin_layout Quotation
10575 That ends that example!
10578 \begin_layout Standard
10579 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10580 gives you a lot of power with just
10582 We could have easily nested an
10603 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10606 \begin_layout Subsection
10608 \begin_inset Index idx
10611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10612 Nesting ! Separation
10618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10620 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10627 \begin_layout Standard
10628 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10630 For example you need two different enumerations:
10633 \begin_layout Enumerate
10638 \begin_layout Enumerate
10643 \begin_layout Enumerate
10647 \begin_layout Standard
10648 \begin_inset Separator plain
10654 \begin_layout Itemize
10660 \begin_layout Standard
10661 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10667 \begin_layout Enumerate
10671 \begin_layout Enumerate
10675 \begin_layout Enumerate
10679 \begin_layout Standard
10680 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10681 list item and use the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Separated <Name> Above
10688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10689 Separated <Name> Below
10692 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10693 ) and before or behind it the
10695 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10698 \begin_layout Standard
10699 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10700 (red arrow in LyX).
10701 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10702 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10705 \begin_layout Standard
10706 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10709 arg "paragraph-break"
10716 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10719 \begin_layout Section
10720 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10721 \begin_inset Index idx
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10735 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10737 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10738 be broken at the end of a line.
10739 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10743 \begin_layout Subsection
10745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10747 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10752 \begin_inset Index idx
10755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10764 \begin_layout Standard
10765 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10766 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10767 ) not to break the line at
10769 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10772 \begin_layout Quote
10773 Further documentation is given in section
10774 \begin_inset Newline newline
10778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10788 \begin_layout Standard
10789 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10804 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 A protected space is set with
10815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10816 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10818 \begin_inset space ~
10826 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10832 \begin_layout Subsection
10834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10836 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10841 \begin_inset Index idx
10844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10845 Spacing ! Horizontal
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 The length units are listed in Appendix
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10868 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10879 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10884 \begin_inset Index idx
10887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10888 Spaces ! Inter-word
10896 \begin_layout Standard
10897 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10898 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10899 at the ends of sentences.
10900 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10901 automatically takes care about this.
10902 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10903 followed by a period; see section
10904 \begin_inset space ~
10908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10910 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10915 To insert a normal space, select
10917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10918 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10920 \begin_inset space ~
10928 arg "space-insert normal"
10934 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10938 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10943 \begin_inset Index idx
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10955 \begin_layout Standard
10957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10964 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10973 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10974 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10975 inside abbreviations:
10978 \begin_layout Quote
10980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10984 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10987 \begin_layout Standard
10988 or between values and units.
10989 Compare for example this:
10990 \begin_inset Newline newline
10994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10998 \begin_inset Newline newline
11001 10 kg (normal space
11004 \begin_layout Standard
11005 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11008 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11010 \begin_inset space ~
11018 arg "space-insert thin"
11024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11028 \begin_layout Standard
11029 You can also insert the following space types:
11032 \begin_layout Description
11034 \begin_inset space ~
11038 \begin_inset space ~
11041 space A line with a
11042 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11046 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11050 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11053 negative thin space between the arrows.
11056 \begin_layout Description
11058 \begin_inset space ~
11062 \begin_inset space ~
11065 space A line with a
11066 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11070 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11074 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11077 negative medium space between the arrows.
11080 \begin_layout Description
11082 \begin_inset space ~
11086 \begin_inset space ~
11089 space A line with a
11090 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11094 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11098 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11101 negative thick space between the arrows.
11104 \begin_layout Description
11106 \begin_inset space ~
11110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11114 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11118 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11122 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11126 \begin_inset space ~
11130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11133 em) space between the arrows.
11136 \begin_layout Description
11138 \begin_inset space ~
11142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11146 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11150 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11154 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11158 \begin_inset space ~
11162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11165 em) space between the arrows.
11168 \begin_layout Description
11170 \begin_inset space ~
11174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11178 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11182 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11186 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11190 \begin_inset space ~
11194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11197 em) space between the arrows.
11200 \begin_layout Description
11202 \begin_inset space ~
11206 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11210 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11215 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11222 cm space between the arrows.
11225 \begin_layout Standard
11227 \begin_inset space ~
11231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11233 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11237 lists the different space sizes.
11240 \begin_layout Standard
11241 \begin_inset Float table
11248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11249 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11254 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11258 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 \begin_inset Tabular
11269 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11270 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11271 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11388 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11547 \begin_inset Index idx
11550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11560 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11561 feature for adding extra space
11562 in a uniform fashion.
11563 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11564 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11565 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11566 equally between themselves.
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11573 \begin_layout Quote
11575 This is on the left side
11576 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11579 This is on the right
11582 \begin_layout Quote
11585 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11589 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11595 \begin_layout Quote
11598 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11602 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11606 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11612 \begin_layout Standard
11613 That was an example in the
11619 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11623 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11627 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11630 is one in a standard paragraph.
11631 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11635 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11638 \begin_layout Standard
11639 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11642 \begin_inset space ~
11647 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11650 \begin_layout Standard
11652 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11656 \begin_inset space ~
11662 \begin_layout Standard
11664 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11674 \begin_layout Standard
11676 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11680 \begin_inset space ~
11686 \begin_layout Standard
11688 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_layout Standard
11700 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11704 \begin_inset space ~
11710 \begin_layout Standard
11712 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11722 \begin_layout Standard
11723 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11731 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11735 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11737 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11738 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11742 option in the space dialog.
11750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11754 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11759 \begin_inset Index idx
11762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11772 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11773 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11776 \begin_layout Standard
11777 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11780 What is correct English?:
11781 \begin_inset Newline newline
11785 \begin_inset Newline newline
11789 \begin_inset space ~
11792 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11793 \begin_inset Newline newline
11797 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11808 \begin_inset Newline newline
11812 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11829 \begin_layout Standard
11831 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11836 \begin_inset space ~
11840 \begin_inset space ~
11844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11848 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11851 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11855 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11861 \begin_inset space ~
11865 \begin_inset space ~
11869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11872 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11881 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11882 That is why it is named
11883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11891 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11892 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11896 \begin_layout Subsection
11898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11900 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11905 \begin_inset Index idx
11908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11921 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11923 \begin_inset space ~
11929 There you find the following sizes:
11932 \begin_layout Standard
11945 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11946 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11951 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11956 \begin_inset space ~
11962 \begin_inset Index idx
11965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11966 Document ! Settings
11971 for the paragraph separation.
11972 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11983 \begin_layout Standard
11989 \begin_inset Index idx
11992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11998 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11999 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12004 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12005 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12014 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12023 s are described in section
12024 \begin_inset space ~
12028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12030 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12039 If there are several
12043 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12044 You can therefore use
12048 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12056 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12057 \begin_inset space ~
12061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12063 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12070 \begin_layout Standard
12071 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12081 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12082 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12094 \begin_layout Subsection
12095 Paragraph Alignment
12096 \begin_inset Index idx
12099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12100 Paragraph ! Alignment
12108 \begin_layout Standard
12109 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12111 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 dialog (toolbar button
12117 arg "layout-paragraph"
12121 There are five possibilities:
12124 \begin_layout Itemize
12132 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12138 \begin_layout Itemize
12146 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12152 \begin_layout Itemize
12160 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12166 \begin_layout Itemize
12174 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12180 \begin_layout Itemize
12188 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12194 \begin_layout Standard
12195 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12196 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12197 the left and right margins.
12198 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12201 \begin_layout Standard
12203 This paragraph is right aligned,
12206 \begin_layout Standard
12208 this one is centered,
12211 \begin_layout Standard
12213 this one is left aligned.
12216 \begin_layout Subsection
12218 \begin_inset Index idx
12221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12222 Page breaks ! Forced
12228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12230 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12237 \begin_layout Standard
12238 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12239 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12240 force a page break where you want one.
12241 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12242 is good at page breaking.
12243 Only if you use a lot of
12247 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12248 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12251 \begin_layout Standard
12252 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12253 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12257 have to change the page breaking.
12260 \begin_layout Standard
12261 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12263 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12274 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12277 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12284 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12286 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12287 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12290 \begin_layout Standard
12291 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12292 at the top of a page.
12293 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12295 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12296 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12297 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12301 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12305 to learn more about
12312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12316 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12321 \begin_inset Index idx
12324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12325 Page breaks ! Clear
12333 \begin_layout Standard
12334 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12335 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12336 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12337 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12338 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12341 \begin_layout Standard
12342 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 \begin_inset space ~
12353 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12356 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12358 \begin_inset space ~
12362 \begin_inset space ~
12367 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12368 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12371 \begin_layout Subsection
12373 \begin_inset Index idx
12376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12385 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12392 \begin_layout Standard
12393 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12395 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12398 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12400 \begin_inset space ~
12404 \begin_inset space ~
12412 arg "newline-insert newline"
12416 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12418 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12419 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12421 \begin_inset space ~
12425 \begin_inset space ~
12433 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12436 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12438 This is useful to avoid
12439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12446 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12449 \begin_layout Standard
12450 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12451 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12453 very good at line breaking.
12454 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12455 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12456 \begin_inset space ~
12460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12462 reference "sec:Quote"
12467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12469 reference "sec:Verse"
12474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12476 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12483 \begin_layout Subsection
12485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12487 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12492 \begin_inset Index idx
12495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 \begin_layout Standard
12506 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12517 \begin_layout Standard
12521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12522 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12524 \begin_inset space ~
12529 you can insert horizontal lines.
12530 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12531 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12532 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12535 \begin_layout Standard
12537 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12548 \begin_layout Section
12549 Characters and Symbols
12552 \begin_layout Standard
12553 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12554 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12555 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12563 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12567 for information on how this is done.
12570 \begin_layout Standard
12571 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12576 dialog via the menu
12578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12579 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12585 \begin_layout Standard
12586 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12594 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12595 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12597 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12605 \begin_layout Section
12606 Fonts and Text Styles
12607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12609 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12616 \begin_layout Subsection
12618 \begin_inset Index idx
12621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12630 \begin_layout Standard
12631 There are two types of fonts:
12634 \begin_layout Description
12636 \begin_inset space ~
12640 \begin_inset Index idx
12643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12649 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12654 characters) in the font.
12655 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12656 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12657 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12658 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12659 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12660 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12661 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12662 \begin_inset Newline newline
12665 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12666 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12667 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12668 sizes than at small ones.
12669 \begin_inset Newline newline
12683 \begin_inset space ~
12691 \begin_layout Description
12693 \begin_inset space ~
12697 \begin_inset Index idx
12700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12706 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12707 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12708 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12709 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12710 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12711 image manipulation program.
12712 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12713 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12714 \begin_inset space ~
12717 pixels high up to 34
12718 \begin_inset space ~
12721 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12722 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12723 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12725 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12726 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12727 \begin_inset Newline newline
12730 Bitmap fonts are named
12733 \begin_inset space ~
12738 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12741 \begin_layout Standard
12742 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12743 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12744 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12745 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12746 use scalable fonts.
12749 \begin_layout Standard
12750 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12753 \begin_layout Standard
12754 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12756 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12758 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12761 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12762 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12763 font to emphasize text, you use an
12764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12772 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12774 In \SpecialChar LyX
12775 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12779 \begin_layout Subsection
12782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12784 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12791 \begin_layout Standard
12792 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12793 used its own fonts.
12794 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12795 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12798 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12799 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12800 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12801 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12802 to a word processor.
12803 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12804 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12805 files are very portable across
12806 different machines.
12807 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12808 has increased a lot
12809 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12812 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12820 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12825 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12826 code in the document
12827 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12830 \begin_layout Standard
12831 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12832 engines that are also able directly
12833 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12835 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12837 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12839 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12840 that is installed on your system.
12841 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12844 \begin_layout Standard
12845 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12853 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12854 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12862 \begin_layout Subsection
12863 Document Font and Font size
12864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12866 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12871 \begin_inset Index idx
12874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12881 \begin_inset Index idx
12884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12893 \begin_layout Standard
12894 You can set the document fonts in the
12896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12900 \begin_inset Index idx
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12904 Document ! Settings
12914 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12915 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12927 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12929 \begin_inset space ~
12932 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12935 \begin_layout Standard
12940 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12941 This requires that you use
12953 as the output format, i.
12954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12958 \begin_inset space \space{}
12961 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12962 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12963 installed (see section
12964 \begin_inset space ~
12968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12970 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12975 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12977 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12978 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12980 \begin_inset space ~
12983 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12984 cannot determine the family.
12985 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12986 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12989 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12992 \begin_layout Standard
12993 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12994 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12999 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13005 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13007 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13009 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13012 font encoding, this is
13013 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13014 , depending on the document language,
13017 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13018 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13026 \begin_inset space ~
13032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13042 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13043 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13051 \begin_inset space ~
13057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13065 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13086 European Computer Modern
13089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13097 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13100 \begin_layout Standard
13105 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13106 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13111 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13114 \begin_inset space ~
13119 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13125 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13126 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13129 \begin_layout Itemize
13133 \begin_inset space ~
13138 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13156 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13157 community in order to replace
13161 as the default font.
13162 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13163 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13180 One difference is improved kerning.
13188 \begin_layout Itemize
13189 If you do not like the look of
13197 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13218 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13219 \begin_inset space ~
13222 serif and typewriter fonts,
13226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13227 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13234 \begin_inset space ~
13243 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13248 \begin_inset space \space{}
13256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13260 \begin_inset space \space{}
13266 \begin_inset space ~
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13284 but you can also select your own.
13285 \begin_inset Newline newline
13288 The differences between roman,
13291 \begin_inset space ~
13300 fonts are explained in section
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13312 \begin_inset Newline newline
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13323 was originally designed for newspapers.
13324 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13325 into the small newspaper columns.
13329 \begin_inset space ~
13334 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13337 \begin_layout Standard
13338 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13351 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13356 depends on the class you are using.
13357 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13360 \begin_layout Standard
13361 Note that the font size is the
13366 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13367 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13368 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13369 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13378 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13379 \begin_inset space ~
13383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13385 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13392 \begin_layout Standard
13396 \begin_inset space ~
13401 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13403 \begin_inset space ~
13406 serif or typewriter.
13411 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13421 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13424 \begin_layout Standard
13429 LaTeX font encoding
13431 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13432 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13438 \begin_inset Index idx
13441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13449 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13451 \begin_inset space ~
13455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13457 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13464 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13465 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13466 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13470 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13478 \begin_layout Standard
13479 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13481 Use Old Style Figures
13485 Use True Small Caps
13488 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13491 Use Old Style Figures
13493 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13495 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13503 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13507 Use True Small Caps
13509 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13510 of scaled capitals.
13511 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13512 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13513 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13517 \begin_layout Standard
13519 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13520 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13521 provided by the font package (or the
13525 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13530 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13536 \begin_layout Standard
13541 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13542 a font to display the script characters.
13546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13547 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13553 \begin_inset Index idx
13556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13563 So this has no effect for the document language
13579 \begin_layout Standard
13582 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13584 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13585 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13591 \begin_inset Index idx
13594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13596 packages ! microtype
13605 \begin_layout Standard
13608 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13610 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13615 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13616 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13622 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13623 \begin_inset space ~
13627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13629 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13639 \begin_layout Standard
13640 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13652 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13657 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13658 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13660 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13662 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13665 dialog, see section
13666 \begin_inset space ~
13670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13672 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13684 \begin_layout Subsection
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13690 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13692 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13693 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13694 choose a math font in the dialog
13696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13700 \begin_inset Index idx
13703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13704 Document ! Settings
13710 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13711 automatically selects a math font.
13712 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13713 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13722 \begin_inset space ~
13728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13733 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13734 document font is available.
13737 \begin_layout Standard
13738 Note that the math font will not be used for
13742 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13748 or by the insertion of the command
13755 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13756 \begin_inset space ~
13760 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13761 while the math characters do not.
13763 \begin_inset space ~
13766 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13769 \begin_inset space ~
13777 \begin_inset space ~
13782 in the document font settings.
13785 \begin_layout Standard
13786 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13787 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13788 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13789 font (in most cases
13790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13796 \begin_inset space ~
13802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13805 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13806 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13814 \begin_inset space ~
13820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13826 \begin_layout Subsection
13828 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13834 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13838 name "subsec:charstyles"
13845 \begin_inset Index idx
13848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13855 \begin_inset Index idx
13858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13867 \begin_layout Standard
13868 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13869 automatically changes the
13870 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13873 style for certain paragraph environments.
13875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13876 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13878 This is where we meet the concept of
13884 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13886 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13890 \begin_layout Standard
13892 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13897 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13921 e., available with all document classes.
13922 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13926 for specific purposes.
13927 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13932 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13933 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13943 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13947 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13960 — you customized the
13965 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13966 among them, encourage the use of
13978 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13979 \begin_inset space ~
13983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13985 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13990 Rather than fiddling with
13994 , they encourage the use of
13998 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14003 \begin_inset Quotes els
14007 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14010 ), not their form (
14011 \begin_inset Quotes els
14015 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14019 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14020 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14021 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14022 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14023 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14024 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14030 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14034 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14035 With a semantic markup (such as
14039 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14044 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14046 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14047 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14050 \begin_layout Standard
14052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14053 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14054 by \SpecialChar LyX
14060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14063 Builtin Text Styles
14064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14066 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14073 \begin_layout Standard
14075 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14076 The two builtin text styles can be
14077 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14085 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14086 both of these styles
14089 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14097 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14103 \begin_layout Standard
14108 style, do one of the following:
14111 \begin_layout Itemize
14112 click on the toolbar button
14121 \begin_layout Itemize
14122 use the key binding
14129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14133 \begin_layout Itemize
14135 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14143 arg "dialog-show character"
14149 arg "dialog-show character"
14152 ) as described in section
14153 \begin_inset space ~
14157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14159 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14168 \begin_layout Standard
14169 These commands are all toggles.
14174 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14177 \begin_layout Standard
14178 One typically uses the
14182 style for proper names.
14184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14191 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14197 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14201 \begin_layout Standard
14203 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14208 is producing text in
14212 , but the definition can be changed.
14217 \begin_layout Standard
14219 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14229 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14236 \begin_layout Itemize
14237 clicking on the toolbar button
14246 \begin_layout Itemize
14247 using the keybindings
14254 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14258 \begin_layout Itemize
14260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14268 arg "dialog-show character"
14274 arg "dialog-show character"
14277 ) as described in section
14278 \begin_inset space ~
14282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14284 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14293 \begin_layout Standard
14298 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14305 packages use a different font
14306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14307 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14313 \begin_layout Standard
14314 We've been using the
14318 style all over the place in this document.
14319 Here's one more example:
14322 \begin_layout Quotation
14326 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14328 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14334 \begin_layout Standard
14335 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14336 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14337 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14338 the common tendency to overuse
14339 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14341 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14350 \begin_layout Standard
14352 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14353 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14354 only as font changes and integrated in the
14362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14365 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14372 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14378 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14381 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14383 \begin_inset space ~
14386 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14394 arg "dialog-show character"
14400 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14402 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14408 arg "dialog-show character"
14412 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14418 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14422 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14429 \begin_layout Standard
14431 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14432 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14434 \begin_inset space ~
14438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14440 reference "subsec:Modules"
14447 ), or local layout settings (see section
14448 \begin_inset space ~
14452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14454 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14459 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14463 markup for specific functions.
14464 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14469 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14479 \begin_inset Quotes els
14483 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14489 \begin_layout Standard
14491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14492 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14500 \begin_layout Standard
14502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14503 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14508 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14509 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14510 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14515 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14516 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14521 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14529 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14530 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14531 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14532 \begin_inset Flex Code
14535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14537 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14546 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14551 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14560 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14565 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14574 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14575 on screen their formal appearance.
14580 \begin_layout Subsection
14582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14588 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14594 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14596 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14602 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14604 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14610 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14615 \begin_inset Index idx
14618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14627 \begin_layout Standard
14628 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14629 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14632 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14634 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14636 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14640 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14641 the properties of text passages
14642 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14646 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14647 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14648 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14649 from ordinary dialog.
14650 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14654 \begin_layout Standard
14656 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14657 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14658 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14659 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14660 the properties of the respective text passages.
14665 comes in as a last resort.
14670 \begin_layout Standard
14671 Before we document how to
14672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14673 use custom character style
14674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14675 tweak the text properties
14677 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14678 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14680 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14684 \begin_inset Newline newline
14687 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14688 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14691 \begin_layout Standard
14693 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14694 use custom character styles
14695 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14696 tweak text properties
14699 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14704 \begin_inset space ~
14707 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14709 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14715 arg "dialog-show character"
14720 dialog or press the toolbar button
14723 arg "dialog-show character"
14728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14731 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14734 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14737 property that you can choose.
14738 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14741 \begin_inset space ~
14746 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14748 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14752 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14754 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14759 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14760 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14761 environments all at once.
14764 \begin_layout Standard
14766 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14768 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14771 properties, and their options (in addition to
14774 \begin_inset space ~
14780 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14792 \begin_layout Labeling
14793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14807 The possible options are:
14811 \begin_layout Labeling
14812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14817 This is the Roman font family.
14818 Normally a serif font.
14819 It's also the default family.
14829 \begin_layout Labeling
14830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14834 \begin_inset space ~
14841 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14853 \begin_layout Labeling
14854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14861 This is the Typewriter font family.
14867 arg "font-typewriter"
14873 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14877 \begin_layout Standard
14879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14880 The general differences of these families are:
14883 \begin_layout Itemize
14885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14890 fonts use characters with serifs.
14891 These are the small
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14899 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14900 The following example shows the difference:
14901 \begin_inset Newline newline
14905 \begin_inset Newline newline
14910 text without serifs
14913 \begin_inset Newline newline
14916 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14917 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14924 \begin_layout Itemize
14926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14931 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14932 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14933 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14936 \begin_layout Itemize
14938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14951 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14969 \begin_inset Newline newline
14973 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14978 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14989 \begin_inset Note Note
14992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14994 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14995 For more on phantoms see section
14996 \begin_inset space ~
15000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15002 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15012 \begin_inset Newline newline
15021 \begin_layout Labeling
15022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15027 This corresponds to the print weight.
15032 \begin_layout Labeling
15033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15038 This is the Medium font series.
15039 It's also the default series.
15042 \begin_layout Labeling
15043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15050 This is the Bold font series.
15063 \begin_layout Labeling
15064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15069 As the name implies.
15074 \begin_layout Labeling
15075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15080 This is the Upright font shape.
15081 It's also the default shape.
15084 \begin_layout Labeling
15085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15100 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15105 s the Italic font shape
15111 \begin_layout Labeling
15112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15119 This is the Slanted font shape
15121 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15122 , this is different from italic).
15125 \begin_layout Labeling
15126 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15137 This is the Small caps font shape
15144 \begin_layout Labeling
15145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15150 Alters the text color.
15151 Note that not all DVI
15152 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15154 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15157 viewers are able to display colors.
15159 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15165 \begin_inset space ~
15172 , which means that the document default color set in
15174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15175 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15181 \begin_inset space ~
15187 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15189 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15193 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15273 \begin_inset Index idx
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15285 \begin_layout Labeling
15286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15291 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15292 the language of the document.
15293 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15294 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15295 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15298 in blue to indicate the change
15299 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15300 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15304 \begin_inset Newline newline
15307 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15309 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15310 When using the spell checking (see section
15311 \begin_inset space ~
15315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15317 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15321 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15324 \begin_inset Newline newline
15327 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15329 Exclude from Spellchecking
15332 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15335 \begin_layout Labeling
15336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15341 Alters the size of the font.
15343 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15349 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15352 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15353 document font size.
15354 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15355 the details, but a general description of what
15361 \begin_layout Labeling
15362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15383 arg "font-size tiny"
15389 \begin_layout Labeling
15390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15411 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15417 \begin_layout Labeling
15418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15439 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15445 \begin_layout Labeling
15446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 arg "font-size small"
15473 \begin_layout Labeling
15474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15488 It's also the default size.
15492 arg "font-size normal"
15498 \begin_layout Labeling
15499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15520 arg "font-size large"
15526 \begin_layout Labeling
15527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15548 arg "font-size larger"
15554 \begin_layout Labeling
15555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15576 arg "font-size largest"
15582 \begin_layout Labeling
15583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15604 arg "font-size huge"
15610 \begin_layout Labeling
15611 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15632 arg "font-size giant"
15638 \begin_layout Labeling
15639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15644 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15664 arg "font-size increase"
15670 \begin_layout Labeling
15671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15676 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15696 arg "font-size decrease"
15703 \begin_layout Standard
15708 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15709 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15711 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15712 — use those instead.
15713 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15716 \begin_layout Labeling
15717 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15719 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15723 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15729 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15730 change a few other things at the character level
15731 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15732 have text passages being underlined
15736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15737 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15738 days, when you could not change fonts.
15739 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15740 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15741 because some people
15745 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15752 \begin_layout Labeling
15753 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15762 This is text with emphasize on
15765 This might seem like the same as
15769 , but it is actually a bit different.
15775 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15777 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15778 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15782 \begin_layout Labeling
15783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15785 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15790 Don't use underlining.
15795 \begin_layout Labeling
15796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15812 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15821 arg "font-underline"
15827 \begin_inset Newline newline
15831 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15834 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15835 when you could not change fonts.
15836 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15837 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15838 because some people
15842 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15847 \begin_layout Labeling
15848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15852 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15863 This is text with Double under
15864 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15875 arg "font-underunderline"
15879 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15881 \begin_inset Newline newline
15884 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15885 about double underbar
15890 \begin_layout Labeling
15891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15897 \begin_inset space ~
15906 This is text with Wavy under
15907 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15909 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15918 arg "font-underwave"
15922 \begin_inset Newline newline
15925 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15926 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15927 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15932 \begin_layout Labeling
15933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15935 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15940 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15946 \begin_layout Labeling
15947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15954 Don't use strikethrough.
15957 \begin_layout Labeling
15958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15962 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15968 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15976 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15978 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15979 Single strikethrough
15987 arg "font-strikeout"
15991 \begin_inset Newline newline
15994 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15995 changed in the meantime.
15998 \begin_layout Labeling
15999 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16001 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16005 \begin_inset space ~
16009 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16011 \begin_inset space ~
16015 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16023 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16025 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16031 \begin_inset Newline newline
16034 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16038 \begin_layout Standard
16040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16041 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16042 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16043 \begin_inset space ~
16047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16049 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16056 \begin_layout Itemize
16058 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16065 This is text with emphasize on
16070 \begin_layout Itemize
16074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16081 This is text with Noun on.
16083 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16090 , this is a logical attribute.
16091 Normally it's equivalent to
16094 \begin_inset space ~
16104 \begin_layout Standard
16105 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16106 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16108 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16113 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16114 chosen a new character style
16115 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16116 applied a text property
16119 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16122 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16124 \begin_inset space ~
16127 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16135 arg "dialog-show character"
16143 arg "dialog-show character"
16146 ) dialog, the settings are
16147 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16151 You can activate the
16152 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16155 last applied properties
16157 by using the toolbar button
16160 arg "textstyle-apply"
16164 The button lets you apply
16165 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16166 your custom character style
16167 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16170 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16172 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16173 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16174 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16175 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16180 \begin_layout Standard
16181 To completely reset the
16182 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16185 text properties of a selection
16187 to the default, use
16188 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16190 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16200 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16205 from the menu of the toolbar button
16208 arg "textstyle-apply"
16215 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16216 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16217 you just set the shape to
16218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16236 \begin_inset space ~
16250 \begin_layout Standard
16252 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16253 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16261 \begin_inset space ~
16273 \begin_layout Itemize
16275 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16288 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16306 \begin_inset Newline newline
16310 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16324 \begin_inset Note Note
16327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 For more on phantoms see section
16329 \begin_inset space ~
16333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16335 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16345 \begin_inset Newline newline
16351 \begin_layout Itemize
16353 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16358 fonts use characters with serifs.
16359 These are the small
16360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16367 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16368 The following example shows the difference:
16369 \begin_inset Newline newline
16373 \begin_inset Newline newline
16378 text without serifs
16381 \begin_inset Newline newline
16384 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16385 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16392 \begin_layout Itemize
16394 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16399 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16400 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16401 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16406 \begin_layout Standard
16408 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16416 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16417 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16420 \begin_inset space ~
16425 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16426 the property to be removed.
16427 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16428 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16429 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16447 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16448 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16456 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16460 \begin_inset space ~
16465 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16476 If you, for example, set
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_inset space ~
16500 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16509 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16514 \begin_layout Standard
16516 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16519 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16520 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16523 \begin_layout Section
16524 Printing and Previewing
16527 \begin_layout Subsection
16531 \begin_layout Standard
16532 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16533 using \SpecialChar LyX
16534 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16535 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16536 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16537 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16539 Additional Features
16544 \begin_layout Standard
16546 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16549 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16550 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16551 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16554 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16555 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16556 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16557 to turn your writing into printable output.
16558 This happens in two stages:
16561 \begin_layout Enumerate
16562 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16563 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16565 a file with the extension,
16566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16580 \begin_layout Enumerate
16581 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16582 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16583 to use the commands in the
16587 file to produce printable output.
16590 \begin_layout Subsection
16591 Output file formats
16592 \begin_inset Index idx
16595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16604 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16612 Simple text (ASCII)
16613 \begin_inset Index idx
16616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16617 File formats ! ASCII
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16626 This file type has the extension
16627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16639 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16643 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 \begin_layout Standard
16651 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16654 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16656 \begin_inset space ~
16662 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16663 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16664 bibliography (section
16665 \begin_inset space ~
16669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16671 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16676 If your document includes such material, use
16678 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16679 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16681 \begin_inset space ~
16685 \begin_inset space ~
16689 \begin_inset space ~
16697 \begin_inset space ~
16701 \begin_inset space ~
16707 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16708 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16711 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16714 \begin_inset Index idx
16717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16718 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16727 \begin_layout Standard
16728 This file type has the extension
16729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16740 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16744 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16745 -Errors or to process it manually
16746 with console commands.
16747 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16748 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16749 's temporary directory whenever you
16750 view or export your document.
16753 \begin_layout Standard
16754 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16755 -file using the menu
16757 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16758 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16762 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16763 export variants are explained in section
16764 \begin_inset space ~
16768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16770 reference "subsec:Export"
16777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16779 \begin_inset Index idx
16782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16791 \begin_layout Standard
16792 This file type has the extension
16793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16813 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16814 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16815 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16819 \begin_layout Standard
16820 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16821 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16822 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16823 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16824 when you view the DVI.
16825 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16828 \begin_layout Standard
16829 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16831 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16832 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16837 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16838 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16840 \begin_inset space ~
16846 The latter option uses the program
16848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16854 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16857 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16858 font access (see section
16859 \begin_inset space ~
16863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16865 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16870 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16871 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16878 \begin_inset Index idx
16881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16882 File formats ! PostScript
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 This file type has the extension
16892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16904 PostScript was developed by the company
16908 as a printer language.
16909 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16911 PostScript can be seen as a
16912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16915 programming language
16916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16919 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16924 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16931 \begin_inset Index idx
16934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16936 packages ! pstricks
16946 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16949 \begin_layout Standard
16950 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16954 Encapsulated PostScript
16955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16958 (EPS, file extension
16959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16971 As \SpecialChar LyX
16972 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16973 convert them in the background to EPS.
16974 If, for example, you have 50
16975 \begin_inset space ~
16978 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16980 \begin_inset space ~
16983 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16984 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16986 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16987 EPS to avoid this problem.
16990 \begin_layout Standard
16991 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16993 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16994 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17002 \begin_inset Index idx
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17012 \begin_inset Index idx
17015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17024 \begin_layout Standard
17025 This file type has the extension
17026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17042 Portable Document Format
17043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17050 was derived from PostScript.
17051 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17060 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17061 looks exactly the same.
17064 \begin_layout Standard
17065 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17069 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17073 (JPG, file extension
17074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17101 Portable Network Graphics
17102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17105 (PNG, file extension
17106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17118 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17119 converts them in the
17120 background to one of these formats.
17121 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17122 will slow down your workflow.
17123 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17126 \begin_layout Standard
17127 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17129 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17135 \begin_layout Description
17137 \begin_inset space ~
17140 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17144 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17147 \begin_layout Description
17149 \begin_inset space ~
17156 ) This uses the program
17158 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17161 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17164 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17167 is a new engine, derived from
17171 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17172 access (see section
17173 \begin_inset space ~
17177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17179 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17184 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17185 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17190 \begin_layout Description
17192 \begin_inset space ~
17199 ) This uses the program
17204 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17210 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17211 font access (see section
17212 \begin_inset space ~
17216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17218 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17223 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17224 vertically written Japanese.
17227 \begin_layout Description
17229 \begin_inset space ~
17232 (cropped) This is the same as
17235 \begin_inset space ~
17240 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17241 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17242 to generate good-looking
17243 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17246 \begin_layout Description
17248 \begin_inset space ~
17251 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17255 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17259 \begin_layout Description
17261 \begin_inset space ~
17264 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17268 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17269 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17273 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17274 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17277 \begin_layout Standard
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17290 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17291 works without problems.
17292 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17293 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17297 \begin_inset space ~
17305 \begin_inset space ~
17310 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17318 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17320 \begin_inset Index idx
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 FileFormats ! XHTML
17330 \begin_inset Index idx
17333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17342 \begin_layout Standard
17343 This file type has the extension
17344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17356 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17357 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17358 When \SpecialChar LyX
17359 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17360 suitable for the purpose.
17361 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17363 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17364 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17367 between different formats, which are described in section
17369 Math Output in XHTML
17374 \begin_inset space ~
17382 \begin_layout Standard
17383 XHTML output remains
17384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17391 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17392 features are supported yet.
17396 and the World Wide Web
17400 Additional Features
17402 manual, for more information.
17405 \begin_layout Standard
17406 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17408 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17409 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17415 \begin_layout Subsection
17417 \begin_inset Index idx
17420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17429 \begin_layout Standard
17430 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17431 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17440 or use the toolbar button
17447 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17448 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17449 \begin_inset space ~
17453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17455 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17459 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17461 \begin_inset space ~
17465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17467 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17472 Further output formats can be selected via
17474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17475 View (Other Formats)
17477 or the toolbar button
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17488 viewer window using the menu
17490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17496 Update (Other Formats)
17501 \begin_layout Standard
17502 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17505 To have a real output, export your document.
17508 \begin_layout Section
17509 A few Words about Typography
17510 \begin_inset Index idx
17513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 \begin_layout Subsection
17523 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17524 \begin_inset Index idx
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17534 \begin_inset Index idx
17537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17546 \begin_layout Standard
17547 In \SpecialChar LyX
17549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17560 symbol comes in four variants: the
17577 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17594 height_special "totalheight"
17599 backgroundcolor "none"
17602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17603 \begin_inset Tabular
17604 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17605 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17607 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17608 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17609 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17638 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17678 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17701 system key combination
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17718 and the em dash with
17721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17734 is the Mac label for the right
17745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17758 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17781 system key combination or
17782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17796 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17809 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17848 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17854 \begin_layout Standard
17855 Dashes can also be inserted with
17857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17859 \begin_inset space ~
17862 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17870 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17871 and 2014 for the en dash).
17874 \begin_layout Standard
17875 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17876 mode and has a length of its own.
17877 Here are some examples:
17880 \begin_layout Enumerate
17881 line- and page-breaks
17882 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17892 \begin_layout Enumerate
17894 \begin_inset space ~
17898 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17908 \begin_layout Enumerate
17909 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17910 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17920 \begin_layout Enumerate
17921 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17925 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17935 \begin_layout Standard
17937 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17939 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17940 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17948 \begin_layout Subsection
17949 Dashes and Line Breaks
17950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17952 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17959 \begin_layout Standard
17960 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17961 case and locale, e.
17962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17968 \begin_layout Itemize
17969 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17970 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17973 \begin_layout Itemize
17974 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17978 \begin_layout Itemize
17979 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17980 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17983 \begin_layout Standard
17984 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17985 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17996 allows line breaks after hyphens
17997 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17999 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18002 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18005 \begin_layout Enumerate
18006 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18007 \begin_inset space ~
18010 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18012 The Elements of Typographic Style
18015 \begin_inset space ~
18018 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18021 \begin_layout Enumerate
18022 Unwanted line breaks
18027 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18029 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18032 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18039 Prevent Hyphenation
18044 \begin_inset space ~
18060 in \SpecialChar TeX
18062 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18063 , a protected space does not suffice
18067 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18074 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18075 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18076 in the document language.
18077 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18091 \begin_layout Itemize
18093 \begin_inset space ~
18097 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18107 height_special "totalheight"
18112 backgroundcolor "none"
18115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18124 \begin_layout Itemize
18126 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18136 height_special "totalheight"
18141 backgroundcolor "none"
18144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18146 \begin_inset space ~
18154 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18155 \begin_inset space ~
18158 – sont très utiles.
18161 \begin_layout Itemize
18166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18175 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18179 \begin_layout Standard
18180 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18181 \begin_inset space ~
18184 – in contrast to an overfull line
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18188 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18192 \begin_layout Standard
18193 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18196 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18197 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18198 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18199 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18204 \begin_layout Enumerate
18205 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18206 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18207 or \SpecialChar TeX
18213 \begin_layout Itemize
18215 \begin_inset space ~
18218 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18222 – sont très utiles.
18226 \begin_layout Enumerate
18227 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18228 \begin_inset Newline newline
18233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18234 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18235 Optional line break
18241 \begin_layout Itemize
18242 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18243 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18244 should be followed by
18245 a line break opportunity.
18248 \begin_layout Standard
18249 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18250 \begin_inset space ~
18254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18256 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18267 \begin_layout Enumerate
18268 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18269 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18270 or en dashes (see section
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18277 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18288 Changes and backwards compatibility
18291 \begin_layout Standard
18292 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18294 \begin_inset space ~
18297 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18298 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18307 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18308 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18316 \begin_layout Standard
18317 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18319 \begin_inset space ~
18322 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18324 prevents ligation to dashes.
18326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18338 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18339 after the input (unless the current text font is
18347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18348 The behavior was changed since
18349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18365 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18366 as non-breakable dashes.
18367 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18376 \begin_layout Standard
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18387 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18389 \begin_inset space ~
18392 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18396 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18397 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18398 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18400 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18404 If you used both literal and
18405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18412 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18414 \begin_inset space ~
18417 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18418 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18421 \begin_layout Subsection
18423 \begin_inset Index idx
18426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18435 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18442 \begin_layout Standard
18443 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18444 but automatically in the output.
18445 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18451 \begin_inset Index idx
18454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18461 following the rules of the document language.
18463 does not hyphenate text in the
18467 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18470 \begin_layout Standard
18472 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18476 font and with unusual constructs, like
18477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18485 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18486 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18487 This is done with the menu
18489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18490 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18492 \begin_inset space ~
18498 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18500 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18504 \begin_layout Standard
18505 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18506 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18517 would then see the hyphen
18518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18525 as a line break possibility.
18526 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18527 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18531 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18534 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18536 Prevent Hyphenation
18541 \begin_inset space ~
18549 \begin_layout Subsection
18551 \begin_inset Index idx
18554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18564 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18567 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18574 \begin_layout Standard
18575 When \SpecialChar LyX
18576 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18577 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18579 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18585 appropriate amount of space.
18586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18589 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18591 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18592 gets after another word.
18595 \begin_layout Standard
18596 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18597 not work in all cases.
18599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18610 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18611 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18614 \begin_layout Standard
18615 Here are some examples of
18619 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18622 \begin_layout Itemize
18627 \begin_layout Itemize
18632 \begin_layout Standard
18633 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18636 \begin_layout Itemize
18638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18642 this is too much space!
18645 \begin_layout Itemize
18650 \begin_layout Standard
18651 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18654 \begin_layout Standard
18655 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18658 \begin_layout Enumerate
18662 \begin_inset space ~
18667 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18668 \begin_inset space ~
18672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18674 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18679 \begin_inset Index idx
18682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18683 Spaces ! inter-word
18691 \begin_layout Enumerate
18695 \begin_inset space ~
18700 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18701 \begin_inset space ~
18705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18707 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18712 \begin_inset Index idx
18715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 \begin_layout Enumerate
18728 \begin_inset space ~
18732 \begin_inset space ~
18736 \begin_inset space ~
18743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18745 \begin_inset space ~
18750 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18751 This function is also bound to
18754 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18760 \begin_layout Standard
18761 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18764 \begin_layout Itemize
18766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18770 \begin_inset space \space{}
18773 this is too much space!
18776 \begin_layout Itemize
18777 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18781 \begin_layout Standard
18782 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18783 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18785 will take care of this.
18788 \begin_layout Standard
18789 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18799 feature described in the section
18801 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18806 Additional Features
18811 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18813 \begin_inset Index idx
18816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18817 Typography ! Quotation marks
18823 \begin_inset Index idx
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 Quotation marks | see
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18857 \begin_layout Standard
18859 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18860 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18861 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18871 The keyboard character,
18875 , generates this automatically.
18878 \begin_layout Standard
18879 You can specify what character the
18883 key produces by using the submenu
18889 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18893 \begin_inset Index idx
18896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 Document ! Settings
18902 dialog and switching the
18906 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18907 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18909 \begin_inset space ~
18915 \begin_layout Labeling
18916 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18928 \begin_inset space ~
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18936 \begin_inset Quotes els
18940 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18954 \begin_inset Quotes els
18958 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18961 quotation marks (as common, e.
18962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18968 \begin_layout Labeling
18969 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18972 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18976 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18980 \begin_inset space ~
18984 \begin_inset space ~
18988 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18992 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18998 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19002 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19006 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19010 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19013 quotation marks (as common, e.
19014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19020 \begin_layout Labeling
19021 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19024 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19028 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19032 \begin_inset space ~
19036 \begin_inset space ~
19040 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19044 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19050 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19054 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19058 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19062 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19065 quotation marks (as common, e.
19066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19072 \begin_layout Labeling
19073 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19076 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19080 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19084 \begin_inset space ~
19088 \begin_inset space ~
19092 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19096 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19102 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19106 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19110 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19114 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19117 quotation marks (as common, e.
19118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19124 \begin_layout Labeling
19125 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19128 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19132 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19136 \begin_inset space ~
19140 \begin_inset space ~
19144 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19148 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19154 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19158 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19162 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19166 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19169 quotation marks (as common, e.
19170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19173 g., in Switzerland)
19176 \begin_layout Labeling
19177 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19180 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19184 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19188 \begin_inset space ~
19192 \begin_inset space ~
19196 \begin_inset Quotes als
19200 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19206 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19210 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19214 \begin_inset Quotes als
19218 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19221 quotation marks (as common, e.
19222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19228 \begin_layout Labeling
19229 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19232 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19236 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19240 \begin_inset space ~
19244 \begin_inset space ~
19248 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19252 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19258 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19262 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19266 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19270 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19273 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19276 \begin_layout Labeling
19277 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19280 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19284 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19288 \begin_inset space ~
19292 \begin_inset space ~
19296 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19300 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19306 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19310 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19314 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19318 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19321 quotation marks (as common, e.
19322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19325 g., in Great Britain)
19328 \begin_layout Labeling
19329 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19332 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19336 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19340 \begin_inset space ~
19344 \begin_inset space ~
19348 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19352 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19358 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19362 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19366 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19370 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19373 quotation marks (as common, e.
19374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19380 \begin_layout Labeling
19381 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19384 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19388 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19392 \begin_inset space ~
19396 \begin_inset space ~
19400 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19404 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19410 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19414 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19418 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19422 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19425 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19430 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19431 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19432 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19433 the inner marks differ).
19441 \begin_layout Labeling
19442 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19445 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19449 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19453 \begin_inset space ~
19457 \begin_inset space ~
19461 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19465 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19471 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19475 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19479 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19483 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19486 quotation marks (as common, e.
19487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19493 \begin_layout Labeling
19494 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19497 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19501 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19505 \begin_inset space ~
19509 \begin_inset space ~
19513 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19517 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19523 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19527 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19531 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19535 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19538 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19541 \begin_layout Labeling
19542 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19543 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19551 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19557 \begin_inset space ~
19561 \begin_inset space ~
19567 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19575 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19579 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19583 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19587 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19591 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19594 quotation marks (as common, e.
19595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19604 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19612 \begin_layout Labeling
19613 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19614 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19622 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19632 \begin_inset space ~
19638 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19646 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19650 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19654 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19658 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19662 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19665 quotation marks (as common, e.
19666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19669 g., in North Korea and China)
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19675 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19683 \begin_layout Standard
19684 Inner quotation marks
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19690 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19691 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19699 does not necessarily mean
19700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19708 This is why we call them
19709 \begin_inset Quotes els
19713 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19729 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19731 \begin_inset Quotes els
19735 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19738 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19741 arg "quote-insert inner"
19746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19752 \begin_layout Standard
19753 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19754 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19755 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19756 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19757 If you check the setting
19759 Use dynamic quotation marks
19763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19764 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19767 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19768 they appear in a special color).
19769 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19770 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19775 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19778 \begin_layout Standard
19779 Individual quotation marks (i.
19780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19783 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19784 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19788 \begin_layout Subsection
19790 \begin_inset Index idx
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19794 Typography ! Ligatures
19800 \begin_inset Index idx
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19834 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19841 \begin_layout Standard
19842 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19843 print them as single characters.
19844 These groups are known as
19849 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19850 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19852 Here are the standard ligatures:
19855 \begin_layout Itemize
19859 \begin_layout Itemize
19863 \begin_layout Itemize
19867 \begin_layout Itemize
19871 \begin_layout Itemize
19875 \begin_layout Standard
19876 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19879 \begin_layout Standard
19880 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19881 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19889 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19905 To break a ligature, use
19907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19908 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19910 \begin_inset space ~
19917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19928 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19945 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19953 \begin_layout Subsection
19955 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19957 \begin_inset Index idx
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 \begin_layout Standard
19973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19974 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19978 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19981 \begin_layout Description
19983 The name of the game.
19986 \begin_layout Description
19988 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19992 \begin_layout Description
19994 The \SpecialChar TeX
19995 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19999 \begin_layout Description
20000 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20001 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20005 \begin_layout Standard
20006 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20012 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20020 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20021 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20022 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20023 converges to the number
20024 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20027 : The actual version is
20028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20036 , the previous one was
20037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20048 \begin_layout Subsection
20050 \begin_inset Index idx
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 \begin_layout Standard
20063 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20064 space between two words.
20065 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20075 for units use the menu
20077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20078 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20080 \begin_inset space ~
20088 arg "space-insert thin"
20094 \begin_layout Standard
20095 Here is an example to show the differences:
20098 \begin_layout Standard
20099 \begin_inset Tabular
20100 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20101 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20102 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20103 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 \begin_inset space ~
20114 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 space between number and unit
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20142 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 half space between number and unit
20167 \begin_layout Subsection
20169 \begin_inset Index idx
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20181 \begin_layout Standard
20182 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20184 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20185 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20186 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20187 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20188 These bits of text became known as
20199 \begin_layout Standard
20200 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20201 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20202 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20203 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20204 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20205 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20206 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20207 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20208 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20209 \begin_inset Newline newline
20217 \begin_inset Newline newline
20225 \begin_inset Newline newline
20228 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20229 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20230 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20232 \begin_inset space ~
20236 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20238 key "latexcompanion"
20244 \begin_inset space ~
20248 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20255 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20256 's page break mechanism.
20259 \begin_layout Chapter
20260 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20263 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20270 \begin_layout Standard
20271 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20274 \begin_inset space ~
20280 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20283 \begin_layout Section
20285 \begin_inset Index idx
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20304 \begin_layout Standard
20306 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20309 \begin_layout Description
20312 \begin_inset space ~
20315 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20316 \begin_inset Newline newline
20320 \begin_inset Note Note
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20332 \begin_layout Description
20333 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20334 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20335 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20338 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20339 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20341 \begin_inset space ~
20347 \begin_inset Newline newline
20351 \begin_inset Note Comment
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20364 \begin_layout Description
20366 \begin_inset space ~
20369 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20370 set in the document settings under
20372 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20374 \begin_inset space ~
20380 \begin_inset Newline newline
20384 \begin_inset Newline newline
20388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20397 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20398 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20403 of a comment that appears in the output.
20409 \begin_inset Newline newline
20413 \begin_inset Newline newline
20416 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20419 \begin_layout Standard
20420 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20432 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20435 \begin_layout Section
20437 \begin_inset Index idx
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20449 name "sec:Footnotes"
20456 \begin_layout Standard
20458 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20464 or the toolbar button
20467 arg "footnote-insert"
20479 \begin_inset Graphics
20480 filename clipart/footnote.png
20489 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20490 's representation of your footnote.
20500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20519 label, the box will
20523 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20524 Clicking on the box label again will close
20537 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20538 and click on the footnote
20553 \begin_layout Standard
20554 Here is an example footnote:
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20571 \begin_layout Standard
20572 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20573 position where the footnote box is placed.
20574 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20575 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20576 according to the document class.
20578 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20579 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20585 ey are described in the
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20596 \begin_layout Section
20598 \begin_inset Index idx
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20610 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20617 \begin_layout Standard
20618 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20620 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20624 \begin_inset space ~
20629 or the toolbar button
20632 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20658 appearing within your text.
20659 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20660 's representation of your margin
20669 \begin_layout Standard
20670 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20674 \begin_inset Marginal
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 This is a marginal note.
20687 \begin_layout Standard
20688 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20689 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20690 pages, right on odd pages.
20693 \begin_layout Standard
20694 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20697 \begin_inset space ~
20705 \begin_inset space ~
20713 \begin_layout Section
20714 Graphics and Images
20715 \begin_inset Index idx
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 \begin_inset Index idx
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20737 name "sec:Graphics"
20744 \begin_layout Standard
20745 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20746 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20749 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20758 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20761 \begin_layout Standard
20762 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20767 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20768 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20770 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20771 \begin_inset space ~
20775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20777 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20784 \begin_layout Standard
20789 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20790 of the image in the output.
20791 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20795 \begin_inset space ~
20799 \begin_inset space ~
20808 \begin_inset space ~
20812 \begin_inset space ~
20816 \begin_inset space ~
20821 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20822 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20830 \begin_layout Standard
20834 \begin_inset space ~
20838 \begin_inset space ~
20843 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20844 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20846 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20851 \begin_inset space ~
20856 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20857 with the image size is printed.
20860 \begin_layout Standard
20861 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20862 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20864 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20867 \begin_layout Standard
20869 \begin_inset Graphics
20870 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20878 \begin_layout Standard
20879 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20880 the image into a float, see section
20881 \begin_inset space ~
20885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20887 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20894 \begin_layout Subsection
20896 \begin_inset Index idx
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20908 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20915 \begin_layout Standard
20916 You can insert images in any known file format.
20917 But as we explained in section
20918 \begin_inset space ~
20922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20924 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20928 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20930 therefore uses the program
20934 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20935 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20936 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20937 \begin_inset space ~
20941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20943 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20950 \begin_layout Standard
20951 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20954 \begin_layout Description
20956 \begin_inset space ~
20959 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20960 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20961 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20965 Graphics Interchange Format
20966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20969 (GIF, file extension
20970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20982 \begin_inset Index idx
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21017 Portable Network Graphics
21018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21021 (PNG, file extension
21022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21034 \begin_inset Index idx
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21069 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21073 (JPG, file extension
21074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21098 \begin_inset Index idx
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 \begin_layout Description
21134 \begin_inset space ~
21137 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21139 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21140 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21141 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21142 \begin_inset Newline newline
21145 Scalable image formats can be
21146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21149 Scalable Vector Graphics
21150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21153 (SVG, file extension
21154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21166 \begin_inset Index idx
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21201 Encapsulated PostScript
21202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21205 (EPS, file extension
21206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21218 \begin_inset Index idx
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21253 Portable Document Format
21254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21257 (PDF, file extension
21258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21270 \begin_inset Index idx
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21288 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21289 result will not be scalable.
21290 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21304 \begin_layout Standard
21305 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21312 \begin_layout Subsection
21313 Grouping of Image Settings
21314 \begin_inset Index idx
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 Images ! Settings grouping
21326 \begin_layout Standard
21327 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21329 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21330 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21332 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21333 need to manually change each of them.
21337 \begin_layout Standard
21338 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21341 \begin_inset space ~
21345 \begin_inset space ~
21357 \begin_inset space ~
21361 \begin_inset space ~
21367 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21368 and checking the name of the desired group.
21371 \begin_layout Section
21373 \begin_inset Index idx
21376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21392 \begin_layout Standard
21393 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21396 arg "tabular-insert"
21401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21405 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21406 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21407 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21410 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21411 from the rest of the table.
21412 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21413 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21415 Here is an example table:
21418 \begin_layout Standard
21420 \begin_inset Tabular
21421 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21422 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21424 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21425 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21426 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21624 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21628 \begin_layout Standard
21630 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21631 This corresponds to the
21632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21639 table style listed in the style selection.
21642 \begin_layout Standard
21644 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21645 Other available styles include:
21648 \begin_layout Itemize
21650 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21659 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21663 \begin_layout Itemize
21665 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21666 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21669 \begin_layout Itemize
21671 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21680 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21681 bold top/bottom lines (see
21692 \begin_layout Standard
21694 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21695 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21696 button can be changed in
21698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21699 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21703 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21707 \begin_layout Subsection
21711 \begin_layout Standard
21712 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21715 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21719 This brings up the table dialog.
21720 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21721 cursor is placed currently.
21722 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21723 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21724 done on all of your selection.
21727 \begin_layout Standard
21728 In addition to the table dialog, the
21731 \begin_inset space ~
21736 helps you in setting table properties.
21737 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21740 \begin_layout Standard
21744 \begin_inset space ~
21749 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21750 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21751 current cell respectively.
21752 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21754 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21755 of text, see section
21756 \begin_inset space ~
21760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21762 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21769 \begin_layout Standard
21770 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21771 using the check box
21780 This will merge the cells to
21784 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21785 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21786 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21787 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21788 in the last row without the upper border:
21791 \begin_layout Standard
21793 \begin_inset Tabular
21794 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21795 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21796 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21797 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 \begin_layout Standard
21931 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21932 -arguments for the table.
21933 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21934 explained in the chapter
21941 \begin_inset space ~
21947 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21948 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21949 but are visible in the output.
21952 \begin_layout Standard
21953 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 Most DVI-viewers are
21965 able to display rotations.
21973 \begin_layout Standard
21978 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21983 adds lines for all cell borders.
21986 \begin_layout Subsection
21988 \begin_inset Index idx
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 Tables ! Multi-page
21998 \begin_inset Index idx
22001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22010 \begin_layout Standard
22011 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22014 \begin_inset space ~
22018 \begin_inset space ~
22026 \begin_inset space ~
22031 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22032 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22035 \begin_layout Description
22040 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22041 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22042 Except for the first page, if
22045 \begin_inset space ~
22053 \begin_layout Description
22057 \begin_inset space ~
22062 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22063 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22066 \begin_layout Description
22071 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22072 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22073 except for the last page, if
22076 \begin_inset space ~
22084 \begin_layout Description
22088 \begin_inset space ~
22093 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22094 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22097 \begin_layout Description
22098 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22099 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22105 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22108 \begin_inset space ~
22116 \begin_layout Standard
22117 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22118 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22119 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22125 In this context, first means first in this order:
22128 \begin_inset space ~
22140 \begin_inset space ~
22145 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22148 \begin_layout Standard
22150 \begin_inset Tabular
22151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22152 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22153 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22154 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22155 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22156 <row endfirsthead="true">
22157 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22168 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22177 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <row endfirsthead="true">
22188 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <row endhead="true">
22221 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <row endhead="true">
22252 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 <row endfoot="true">
22285 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23286 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23295 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23337 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23430 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23492 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <row endlastfoot="true">
24267 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 \begin_layout Subsection
24306 \begin_inset Index idx
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24318 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24325 \begin_layout Standard
24326 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24327 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24328 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24329 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24333 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24336 \begin_layout Standard
24337 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24338 for the column in the table dialog.
24339 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24340 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24344 \begin_layout Standard
24346 \begin_inset Tabular
24347 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24348 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24350 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24440 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 This is longer now.
24501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24553 This is longer now.
24558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 \begin_layout Standard
24585 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24586 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24592 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24598 Selection with the mouse or with
24602 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24603 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24604 the selection from outside the table.
24607 \begin_layout Section
24609 \begin_inset Index idx
24612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24628 \begin_layout Subsection
24632 \begin_layout Standard
24633 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24634 have a fixed location.
24636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24643 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24651 \begin_inset space ~
24656 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24657 too many notes on the current page.
24660 \begin_layout Standard
24661 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24662 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24663 and pages without text.
24664 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24665 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24666 Floats are therefore numbered.
24667 Referencing is described in section
24668 \begin_inset space ~
24672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24674 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24681 \begin_layout Standard
24682 To insert a float, use the menu
24684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24688 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24689 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24691 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24692 \begin_inset Index idx
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24702 paragraph within the float.
24703 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24704 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24705 left-clicking on the box label.
24706 A closed float box looks like this:
24707 \begin_inset Graphics
24708 filename clipart/float.png
24713 – a gray button with a red label.
24716 \begin_layout Standard
24717 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24719 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24722 \begin_layout Subsection
24724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24726 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24731 \begin_inset Index idx
24734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24735 Floats ! Figure floats
24743 \begin_layout Standard
24745 \begin_inset space ~
24749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24751 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24755 was created using the menu
24757 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24758 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24764 arg "float-insert figure"
24768 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24777 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24781 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24782 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24784 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24786 \begin_inset space ~
24794 arg "layout-paragraph"
24800 \begin_layout Standard
24801 \begin_inset Float figure
24808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24810 \begin_inset Graphics
24811 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24821 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24826 name "fig:A-star-in"
24843 \begin_layout Standard
24844 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24845 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24856 ) and refer to it using the menu
24858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24864 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24868 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24869 vague references like
24870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24877 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24878 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24888 For more about cross-references, see section
24889 \begin_inset space ~
24893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24895 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24902 \begin_layout Standard
24903 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24904 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24905 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24906 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24907 as described in section
24908 \begin_inset space ~
24912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24914 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24920 \begin_inset space ~
24924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24926 reference "fig:Two-images"
24930 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24931 You can also set the images one below the other.
24933 \begin_inset space ~
24937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24939 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24946 reference "fig:Star"
24950 are the subfigures.
24953 \begin_layout Standard
24954 \begin_inset Float figure
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24966 \begin_inset Float figure
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24979 name "fig:Undefinable"
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24992 \begin_inset Graphics
24993 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25005 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25009 \begin_inset Float figure
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25017 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25035 \begin_inset Graphics
25036 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25048 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25060 name "fig:Two-images"
25077 \begin_layout Subsection
25079 \begin_inset Index idx
25082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25083 Floats ! Table floats
25091 \begin_layout Standard
25092 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25095 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25098 or the toolbar button
25101 arg "float-insert table"
25105 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25106 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25107 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25109 \begin_inset space ~
25113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25115 reference "tab:Table-float"
25122 \begin_layout Standard
25123 \begin_inset Float table
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25136 name "tab:Table-float"
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25150 \begin_inset Tabular
25151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25155 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25303 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25306 \end{array}\right]$
25314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25348 \begin_layout Subsection
25350 \begin_inset Index idx
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25362 \begin_layout Standard
25364 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25365 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25366 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25368 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25376 \begin_inset space ~
25384 \begin_layout Section
25386 \begin_inset Index idx
25389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25398 \begin_layout Standard
25400 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25402 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25403 \begin_inset space \space{}
25410 \begin_layout Standard
25411 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25412 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25418 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25419 and its alignment within the page.
25422 \begin_layout Standard
25424 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25434 height_special "totalheight"
25439 backgroundcolor "none"
25442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25445 This is a minipage.
25446 The text is set in an italic style.
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25453 another formatting.
25461 \begin_layout Standard
25462 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25465 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25469 as described in section
25470 \begin_inset space ~
25474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25476 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25481 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25487 \begin_layout Standard
25488 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25498 height_special "totalheight"
25503 backgroundcolor "none"
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25507 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25508 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25514 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25518 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25528 height_special "totalheight"
25533 backgroundcolor "none"
25536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25537 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25538 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25546 \begin_layout Standard
25547 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25553 \begin_layout Standard
25554 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25556 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25563 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_layout Chapter
25572 Mathematical Formulas
25573 \begin_inset Index idx
25576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25583 \begin_inset Index idx
25586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25617 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25624 \begin_layout Standard
25625 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25630 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25633 \begin_layout Section
25635 \begin_inset Index idx
25638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 \begin_layout Standard
25648 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25661 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25663 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25664 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25665 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25673 \begin_layout Standard
25674 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25678 \begin_inset space ~
25683 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25686 \begin_layout Standard
25687 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25688 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25691 \begin_layout Standard
25692 This is a line with an inline formula
25693 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25699 \begin_layout Standard
25700 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25701 paragraph, like this one:
25702 \begin_inset Formula
25709 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25712 \begin_layout Standard
25714 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25716 For example, typing
25717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25730 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25731 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25735 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25738 \begin_inset space ~
25746 \begin_layout Subsection
25747 Navigating in Formulas
25748 \begin_inset Index idx
25751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25760 \begin_layout Standard
25761 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25762 achieved with the arrow keys.
25764 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25765 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25770 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25771 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25775 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25779 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25782 \end{array}\right]$
25790 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25795 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25796 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25799 \begin_layout Standard
25804 , printed in this document as
25805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25809 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25816 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25817 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25818 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25823 For example, if you want
25824 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25832 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25842 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25846 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25851 , since in the latter case only the
25854 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25859 will be under the square root sign:
25860 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25866 \begin_layout Standard
25867 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25869 \begin_inset Formula
25871 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25880 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25881 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25884 \begin_layout Subsection
25888 \begin_layout Standard
25889 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25890 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25894 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25895 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25896 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25897 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25898 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25902 \begin_layout Subsection
25903 Exponents and Subscripts
25904 \begin_inset Index idx
25907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 \begin_inset Index idx
25917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25926 \begin_layout Standard
25927 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25930 arg "math-superscript"
25936 arg "math-subscript"
25939 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25941 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25944 , type in a formula
25947 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25957 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25963 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25967 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25973 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25979 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25988 , you have to use an extra
25992 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25993 For example, if you want
25994 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26000 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26006 Subscripts are similar: To get
26007 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26013 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26021 \begin_layout Subsection
26023 \begin_inset Index idx
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 Create a fraction either with the command
26042 or by using the icon
26045 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26051 \begin_inset space ~
26057 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26058 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26059 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26064 To move back up, press
26069 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26070 \begin_inset Formula
26072 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26075 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26083 \begin_layout Subsection
26085 \begin_inset Index idx
26088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26097 \begin_layout Standard
26098 Roots can be created using the
26101 \begin_inset space ~
26109 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26115 arg "math-insert \\root"
26137 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26143 always produces a square root.
26146 \begin_layout Subsection
26147 Operators with Limits
26148 \begin_inset Index idx
26151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26158 \begin_inset Index idx
26161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26170 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26177 \begin_layout Standard
26179 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26183 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26186 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26187 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26188 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26189 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26190 The sum operator will automatically place its
26191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26198 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26200 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26204 \begin_inset Formula
26206 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26211 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26215 \begin_layout Standard
26216 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26218 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26219 behind the operator and using the menu
26221 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26222 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26224 \begin_inset space ~
26228 \begin_inset space ~
26242 \begin_layout Standard
26243 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26252 \begin_inset Index idx
26255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26262 \begin_inset Formula
26264 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26269 which will place the
26270 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26282 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26283 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26289 \begin_layout Standard
26290 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26297 Have a look at section
26298 \begin_inset space ~
26302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26304 reference "subsec:Functions"
26308 for an explanation of function macros.
26311 \begin_layout Subsection
26313 \begin_inset Index idx
26316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26325 \begin_layout Standard
26326 Most math symbols can be found in the
26329 \begin_inset space ~
26334 under one of several categories; including
26351 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26355 \begin_layout Standard
26356 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26357 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26358 don't have to use the
26361 \begin_inset space ~
26366 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26368 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26371 \begin_layout Subsection
26373 \begin_inset Index idx
26376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26385 \begin_layout Standard
26386 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26392 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26398 \begin_inset space ~
26406 arg "math-insert \\space"
26410 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26411 For example, the sequence
26416 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26419 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26421 \begin_inset Graphics
26422 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26427 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26428 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26429 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26430 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26431 , because they are negative
26433 Here are two examples:
26436 \begin_layout Standard
26446 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26452 \begin_layout Standard
26462 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26468 \begin_layout Subsection
26470 \begin_inset Index idx
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26482 name "subsec:Functions"
26489 \begin_layout Standard
26493 \begin_inset space ~
26498 contains under the button
26501 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26504 a number of function macros, such as
26505 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26509 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26517 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26524 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26525 avoid confusions, because
26526 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26530 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26536 \begin_layout Standard
26537 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26539 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26543 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26549 \begin_layout Standard
26550 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26551 are placed, as described in section
26552 \begin_inset space ~
26556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26558 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26565 \begin_layout Subsection
26567 \begin_inset Index idx
26570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26579 \begin_layout Standard
26580 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26582 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26583 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26584 commands, for example, to enter
26585 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26588 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26589 Our example is entered by typing
26594 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26601 \begin_inset space ~
26605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26607 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26611 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 \begin_inset Float table
26622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26628 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26632 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26642 \begin_inset Tabular
26643 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26644 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26645 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26647 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26785 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26839 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26893 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26947 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27001 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27055 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27163 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27208 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27229 \begin_layout Standard
27230 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27233 \begin_inset space ~
27241 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27244 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27248 \begin_layout Section
27249 Brackets and Delimiters
27250 \begin_inset Index idx
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27260 \begin_inset Index idx
27263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27272 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27279 \begin_layout Standard
27280 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27282 For some purposes, using just the keys
27287 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27288 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27289 toolbar delimiter icon
27292 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27296 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27297 \begin_inset Formula
27299 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27307 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27308 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27312 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27315 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27321 \begin_inset Formula
27323 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27331 \begin_layout Standard
27332 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27333 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27337 \begin_layout Standard
27338 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27339 left side and right side.
27340 If you use the option
27343 \begin_inset space ~
27348 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27349 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27351 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27356 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27357 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27362 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27363 is to go inside the brackets.
27364 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27369 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27370 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27371 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27375 arg "math-delim ( )"
27381 \begin_layout Section
27382 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27383 \begin_inset Index idx
27386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27393 \begin_inset Index idx
27396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27403 \begin_inset Index idx
27406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27407 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27415 \begin_layout Standard
27416 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27420 \begin_inset space ~
27428 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27432 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27433 Here is an example:
27434 \begin_inset Formula
27436 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27445 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27446 \begin_inset space ~
27450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27452 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27457 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27458 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27459 This alignment is set in the box
27464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27513 for every column as default.
27514 For example, the sequence
27515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27526 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27527 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27528 corresponds to the relevant column.
27529 The result will look like this:
27530 \begin_inset Formula
27533 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27534 column & has & has\,right\\
27535 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27544 \begin_layout Standard
27545 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27548 arg "newline-insert newline"
27551 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27552 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27554 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27557 or the math toolbar.
27560 \begin_layout Standard
27561 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27562 It can be created with the menu
27564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27565 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27567 \begin_inset space ~
27579 Here is an example:
27580 \begin_inset Formula
27594 \begin_layout Standard
27595 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27598 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27601 arg "newline-insert newline"
27605 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27610 arg "newline-insert newline"
27613 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27621 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27622 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27623 A new row is created by every further entry of
27626 arg "newline-insert newline"
27630 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27631 Here is an example:
27632 \begin_inset Formula
27634 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27635 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27640 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27641 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27642 \begin_inset Formula
27644 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27652 \begin_layout Standard
27653 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27660 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27661 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27664 reference "eq:asquared"
27669 The other types are described in section
27670 \begin_inset space ~
27674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27676 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27683 \begin_layout Section
27684 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27685 \begin_inset Index idx
27688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 Math ! Formula numbering
27695 \begin_inset Index idx
27698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27699 Math ! Referencing formulas
27705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27707 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27714 \begin_layout Standard
27715 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27717 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27718 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27720 \begin_inset space ~
27724 \begin_inset space ~
27732 arg "math-number-toggle"
27736 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27737 within parentheses.
27738 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27739 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27740 the document class.
27741 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27742 separated by a dot:
27743 \begin_inset Formula
27753 arg "math-number-toggle"
27756 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27757 You can only number displayed formulas.
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27761 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27763 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27764 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27766 \begin_inset space ~
27770 \begin_inset space ~
27778 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27781 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27782 \begin_inset Formula
27785 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27791 To number all lines use the shortcut
27794 arg "math-number-toggle"
27800 \begin_layout Standard
27801 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27804 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27805 A label is inserted with the menu
27807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27816 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27817 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27818 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27830 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27831 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27832 We inserted in the following example the label
27833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27840 in the second line:
27841 \begin_inset Formula
27843 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27844 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27849 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27850 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27851 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27855 \begin_inset space ~
27863 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27867 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27868 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27869 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27870 as the formula number:
27873 \begin_layout Standard
27874 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27877 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27884 \begin_layout Standard
27885 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27886 's cross-reference box are described in section
27887 \begin_inset space ~
27891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27893 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27898 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27906 \begin_layout Section
27907 User defined math macros
27908 \begin_inset Index idx
27911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 \begin_layout Standard
27922 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27923 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27924 Math macros are explained in section
27927 \begin_inset space ~
27939 \begin_layout Section
27943 \begin_layout Subsection
27945 \begin_inset Index idx
27948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27957 \begin_layout Standard
27958 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27959 To set a font in a formula, use the
27962 \begin_inset space ~
27970 arg "math-insert \\font"
27973 , or enter its command, listed in table
27974 \begin_inset space ~
27978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27980 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27987 \begin_layout Standard
27988 \begin_inset Float table
27995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27996 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28001 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28005 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 \begin_inset Tabular
28016 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28017 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28018 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28051 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28078 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28105 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28138 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28165 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28192 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28226 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28253 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28288 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28313 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28314 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28319 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28320 space when you need a space in the box.
28321 Here is an example where
28322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28333 denotes the set of numbers:
28334 \begin_inset Formula
28336 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28344 \begin_layout Standard
28345 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28346 You can, for example, put a character in
28355 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28359 \begin_inset Newline newline
28362 So it is better not to use this feature.
28365 \begin_layout Standard
28366 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28367 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28371 \begin_inset Newline newline
28374 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28380 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28381 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28387 \begin_layout Standard
28394 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28397 \begin_layout Standard
28398 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28400 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28401 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28403 \begin_inset space ~
28411 \begin_layout Subsection
28413 \begin_inset Index idx
28416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28425 \begin_layout Standard
28426 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28428 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28432 \begin_inset space ~
28436 \begin_inset space ~
28444 \begin_inset space ~
28452 arg "math-insert \\font"
28456 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28457 in black instead of blue.
28458 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28459 Here is an example:
28460 \begin_inset Formula
28463 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28464 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28473 \begin_layout Subsection
28475 \begin_inset Index idx
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28487 \begin_layout Standard
28488 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28489 automatically chosen in most situations.
28507 For most characters,
28515 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28516 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28521 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28522 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28523 thinks are appropriate.
28524 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28527 arg "math-insert \\style"
28531 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28532 For example, you can set
28533 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28536 , which is normally in
28545 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28549 The four styles are used in the following example:
28552 \begin_layout Standard
28553 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28557 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28561 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28565 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28571 \begin_layout Standard
28572 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28573 is set in a particular size with the menu
28575 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28577 \begin_inset space ~
28582 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28583 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28584 will be adjusted to correspond.
28585 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28596 \begin_layout Standard
28600 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28606 \begin_layout Section
28607 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28609 \begin_inset Index idx
28612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28619 \begin_inset Index idx
28622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28631 \begin_layout Standard
28633 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28634 that are in common use.
28637 \begin_layout Subsection
28638 Enabling AMS-Support
28641 \begin_layout Standard
28642 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28643 the document by selecting the checkbox
28646 \begin_inset space ~
28650 \begin_inset space ~
28654 \begin_inset space ~
28661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28665 \begin_inset Index idx
28668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28669 Document ! Settings
28677 \begin_inset space ~
28683 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28684 -errors in formulas,
28685 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28688 \begin_layout Subsection
28690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28692 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28697 \begin_inset Index idx
28700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28701 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28709 \begin_layout Standard
28710 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28711 provides a selection of different formula types.
28713 allows you to choose between
28734 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28735 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28742 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28745 \begin_layout Chapter
28749 \begin_layout Section
28751 \begin_inset Index idx
28754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28763 name "sec:Cross-References"
28770 \begin_layout Standard
28771 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28772 's strengths is cross-references.
28773 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28775 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28776 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28777 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28780 \begin_layout Enumerate
28784 \begin_layout Enumerate
28785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28787 name "enu:Second-item"
28794 \begin_layout Enumerate
28798 \begin_layout Standard
28799 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28804 or by pressing the toolbar button
28811 A gray label box like this:
28812 \begin_inset Graphics
28813 filename clipart/label.png
28817 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28819 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28854 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28855 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28871 \begin_layout Standard
28872 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28877 or the toolbar button
28880 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28884 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28885 \begin_inset Graphics
28886 filename clipart/reference.png
28890 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28892 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28905 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28909 \begin_layout Standard
28910 As an alternative to
28912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28915 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28920 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28921 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28923 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28935 \begin_layout Standard
28936 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28937 \begin_inset space ~
28941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28943 reference "enu:Second-item"
28950 \begin_layout Standard
28951 It is recommended to use a protected space
28955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28956 described in section
28957 \begin_inset space ~
28961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28963 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28972 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28973 line breaks between them.
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28977 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28980 \begin_layout Description
28981 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28984 reference "fig:Two-images"
28991 \begin_layout Description
28992 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28993 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29005 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29012 \begin_layout Description
29013 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29014 \begin_inset space ~
29018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29019 LatexCommand pageref
29020 reference "fig:Two-images"
29027 \begin_layout Description
29029 \begin_inset space ~
29033 \begin_inset space ~
29036 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29038 LatexCommand vpageref
29039 reference "fig:Two-images"
29044 \begin_inset Newline newline
29047 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29048 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29049 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29050 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29051 it prints “on the next page”.
29052 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29055 \begin_layout Description
29057 \begin_inset space ~
29061 \begin_inset space ~
29065 \begin_inset space ~
29068 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29071 reference "fig:Two-images"
29076 \begin_inset Newline newline
29079 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29085 ; otherwise it behaves like
29089 \begin_inset space ~
29093 \begin_inset space ~
29102 \begin_layout Description
29104 \begin_inset space ~
29107 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29108 \begin_inset Newline newline
29112 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29120 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29130 \begin_inset Index idx
29133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29135 packages ! prettyref
29141 \begin_inset Index idx
29144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29146 packages ! refstyle
29157 \begin_inset Newline newline
29160 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29161 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29164 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29169 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29177 is the default and preferred because
29181 supports only English documents.
29182 The format is specified by using the command
29194 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29195 preamble of the document.
29196 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29214 \begin_inset Newline newline
29221 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29226 \begin_inset Newline newline
29237 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29238 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29240 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29241 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29246 , you might do so as follows:
29247 \begin_inset Newline newline
29254 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29259 \begin_inset Newline newline
29262 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29263 the package documentation
29264 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29266 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29272 \begin_inset Newline newline
29283 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29290 \begin_layout Description
29292 \begin_inset space ~
29295 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29297 LatexCommand nameref
29298 reference "fig:Two-images"
29305 \begin_layout Description
29307 \begin_inset space ~
29310 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29311 label for the reference:
29312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29313 LatexCommand labelonly
29314 reference "fig:Two-images"
29319 \begin_inset Newline newline
29322 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29323 Code, if you want to issue a command
29324 that \SpecialChar LyX
29330 , then you may want to use the
29333 \begin_inset space ~
29338 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29348 This is the form needed for e.
29349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29353 \begin_inset space \space{}
29360 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29361 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29363 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29367 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29372 You can only use the style
29376 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29380 is always possible.
29383 \begin_layout Standard
29384 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29385 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29387 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29388 \begin_inset space ~
29392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29394 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29401 \begin_layout Standard
29402 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29406 \begin_inset space ~
29410 \begin_inset space ~
29415 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29416 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29419 \begin_inset space ~
29424 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29425 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29428 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29434 \begin_layout Standard
29435 You can change labels at any time.
29436 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29437 do not need to think about this.
29440 \begin_layout Standard
29441 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29443 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29447 \begin_layout Standard
29448 References are described in detail in the section
29449 \begin_inset space ~
29459 \begin_inset space ~
29467 \begin_layout Section
29468 Table of Contents and other Listings
29469 \begin_inset Index idx
29472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29479 \begin_inset Index idx
29482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29483 Navigating ! Outline
29489 \begin_inset Index idx
29492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29508 \begin_layout Subsection
29510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29512 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29519 \begin_layout Standard
29520 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29523 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29525 \begin_inset space ~
29529 \begin_inset space ~
29535 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29537 If you click on it, the
29541 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29542 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29543 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29545 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29547 \begin_inset space ~
29552 that is described in section
29553 \begin_inset space ~
29557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29559 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29566 \begin_layout Standard
29567 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29568 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29570 \begin_inset space ~
29574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29576 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29580 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29582 \begin_inset space ~
29586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29588 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29592 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29594 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29597 \begin_layout Subsection
29598 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29601 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29608 \begin_layout Standard
29609 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29611 You can insert them via the
29613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29614 List/Contents/References
29617 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29620 \begin_layout Section
29621 URLs and Hyperlinks
29622 \begin_inset Index idx
29625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29632 \begin_inset Index idx
29635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29644 \begin_layout Subsection
29646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29655 \begin_layout Standard
29656 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29664 \begin_layout Standard
29665 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29667 \begin_inset Flex URL
29670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29672 https://www.lyx.org
29680 \begin_layout Standard
29681 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29687 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29691 \begin_layout Standard
29692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29700 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29709 \begin_layout Subsection
29711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29713 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29720 \begin_layout Standard
29721 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29726 or with the toolbar button
29733 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29742 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29743 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29744 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29746 name "LyX's homepage"
29747 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29752 , an Email address like this:
29753 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29755 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29756 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29762 , or a link to a file.
29767 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29775 \begin_layout Standard
29776 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29789 to the link target.
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29794 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29795 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29796 the text style dialog.
29797 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29801 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29803 name "LyX's homepage"
29804 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29813 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29817 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29820 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29824 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29826 \begin_inset Newline newline
29834 \begin_inset Newline newline
29841 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29844 \begin_layout Section
29846 \begin_inset Index idx
29849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29858 name "sec:Appendices"
29865 \begin_layout Standard
29866 Appendices are created with the menu
29868 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29870 \begin_inset space ~
29874 \begin_inset space ~
29880 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29881 as the appendix part of the book.
29882 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29887 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29888 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29889 and the subsection number.
29890 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29894 \begin_layout Standard
29896 \begin_inset space ~
29900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29902 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
29910 \begin_inset space ~
29914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29916 reference "subsec:Export"
29923 \begin_layout Section
29925 \begin_inset Index idx
29928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29937 name "sec:Bibliography"
29944 \begin_layout Standard
29945 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29947 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29948 \begin_inset space ~
29952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29954 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29961 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29966 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29967 \begin_inset space ~
29971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29973 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29978 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29979 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29980 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29984 using a bibliography database.
29987 \begin_layout Standard
29988 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29989 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29993 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29994 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29995 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29996 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29997 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30000 \begin_layout Subsection
30001 The Bibliography Environment
30002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30004 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30011 \begin_layout Standard
30016 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30018 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30027 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30029 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30030 of ASCII characters only.
30034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30039 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30045 \begin_inset Newline newline
30049 \begin_inset Flex URL
30052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30054 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30064 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30074 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30075 \begin_inset Newline newline
30082 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30083 the number of the entry.
30088 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30097 \begin_layout Standard
30098 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30103 or the toolbar button
30106 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30110 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30111 containing the available citations.
30112 Select one or more keys from the list and
30122 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30123 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30127 \begin_layout Standard
30128 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30129 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30130 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30142 \begin_layout Standard
30146 Companion Second Edition
30149 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30151 key "latexcompanion"
30159 \begin_layout Standard
30160 The \SpecialChar LyX
30161 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30162 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30172 \begin_layout Standard
30173 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30180 \begin_inset Index idx
30183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30192 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30193 the label needs to be given the form
30194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30205 Author A and Author B(Year)
30206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30213 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30220 \begin_inset space ~
30225 in the document settings
30226 \begin_inset Index idx
30229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30230 Document ! Settings
30237 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30239 \begin_inset space ~
30245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30247 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30255 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30257 Once you have done that, the
30261 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30278 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30279 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30280 These two are madatory.
30281 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30284 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30286 ) and in abrreviated form (
30293 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30294 add the abbreviated form to
30298 and the full list to the optional
30306 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30307 If specified like this,
30309 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30310 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30320 is specified, toggling
30321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30328 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30329 full and abbreviated list
30333 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30334 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30335 the citation references.
30336 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30341 \begin_layout Standard
30342 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30345 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30347 \begin_inset space ~
30355 arg "layout-paragraph"
30359 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30362 \begin_layout Subsection
30363 Bibliography databases
30364 \begin_inset Index idx
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 Bibliography ! Databases
30374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30376 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30383 \begin_layout Standard
30384 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30390 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30392 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30393 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30398 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30400 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30401 your working field in a database.
30402 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30403 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30404 list for that document.
30405 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30409 \begin_layout Standard
30410 The database is a text file with the file extension
30411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30422 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30423 The format is explained in
30424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30431 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30433 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30435 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30441 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30442 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30443 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30445 \begin_inset Flex URL
30448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30450 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30458 \begin_layout Standard
30460 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30461 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30462 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30464 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30466 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30467 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30468 Those are addressed by
30473 \begin_inset Index idx
30476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30478 packages ! biblatex
30484 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30485 (although it has been significantly
30486 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30496 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30497 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30498 might conversely fail to correctly
30499 handle databases that use specific
30508 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30512 \begin_layout Standard
30513 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30518 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30524 \begin_inset Index idx
30527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30528 Document ! Settings
30540 \begin_inset space ~
30545 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30554 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30556 \begin_inset Index idx
30559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30560 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30569 \begin_layout Standard
30570 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30574 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30576 \begin_inset space ~
30582 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30583 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30591 Add bibliography to TOC
30593 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30598 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30599 in the document or just the cited references.
30601 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30606 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30607 differ from the encoding of the document.
30612 \begin_layout Standard
30613 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30614 style file is a text file with the file extension
30615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30626 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30627 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30628 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30629 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30631 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30637 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30638 \begin_inset Newline newline
30642 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30644 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30654 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30659 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30663 \begin_layout Standard
30664 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30669 \begin_inset Index idx
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30673 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30679 \begin_inset Index idx
30682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30684 packages ! biblatex
30692 \begin_layout Standard
30693 Accessing a database via
30697 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30701 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30703 \begin_inset space ~
30709 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30710 you cannot select a
30715 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30719 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30722 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30723 As for the styles, note the following.
30728 \begin_layout Standard
30733 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30746 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30747 file (text file with the file extension
30748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30759 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30760 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30762 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30771 styles are not set in the
30774 \begin_inset space ~
30779 dialog, but in the document settings.
30780 \begin_inset Index idx
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 Document ! Settings
30789 However, in the dialog in the
30793 field, which is only visible if you use
30797 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30798 example how its heading will appear).
30799 These options are described in detail in the
30804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30814 \begin_layout Standard
30815 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30822 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30833 Bibliography Processors
30836 \begin_layout Standard
30837 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30838 uses a bibliography processor,
30839 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30840 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30841 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30843 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30844 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30847 \begin_layout Standard
30848 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30850 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30851 You can do this on a general level in
30853 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30854 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30855 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30858 or for individual documents in
30860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30861 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30865 The following variants are available by default:
30868 \begin_layout Description
30869 biber a specific, modern processor
30870 \begin_inset Index idx
30873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 developed exclusively for
30884 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30890 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30895 makes use of; if you use the
30899 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30906 \begin_layout Description
30907 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30908 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30909 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30913 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30916 \begin_layout Description
30917 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30918 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30922 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30926 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30930 features are supported.
30933 \begin_layout Standard
30934 By default (with the
30940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30941 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30954 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30955 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30956 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30959 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30960 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30973 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30974 -based bibliography styles).
30975 This should suit most needs.
30978 \begin_layout Standard
30979 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30980 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30981 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30986 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30987 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30988 You can adjust it in
30990 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30991 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30992 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30998 \begin_layout Standard
30999 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31000 can add below the selection.
31001 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31002 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31022 \begin_layout Standard
31024 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31026 These are explained in detail in section
31028 Customizing Bibliographies
31032 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31037 Additional Features
31042 \begin_layout Subsection
31044 \begin_inset Index idx
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31048 Bibliography ! Citation format
31054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31056 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31063 \begin_layout Standard
31064 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31069 \begin_inset space \space{}
31072 numerical citation (as
31073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31080 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31088 ) or author-year citations (as
31089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31098 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31102 \begin_layout Standard
31103 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31107 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31111 \begin_inset Index idx
31114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31115 Document ! Settings
31120 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31126 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31127 labels, is there to use
31130 \begin_inset space ~
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31146 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31149 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31156 \begin_layout Standard
31157 With a bibliography database (see
31158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31160 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31167 ) one has in contrary to the
31171 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31172 These style formats are available:
31175 \begin_layout Description
31177 \begin_inset space ~
31180 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31181 -based approached without any additional packages
31182 (simple numeric citations).
31185 \begin_layout Description
31186 Biblatex loads the package
31191 \begin_inset Index idx
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31196 packages ! biblatex
31201 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31203 Biblatex citation style
31207 Biblatex bibliography style
31210 Options to the package
31214 can be entered in the
31221 \begin_layout Description
31223 \begin_inset space ~
31227 \begin_inset space ~
31230 mode) loads the package
31234 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31235 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31247 behavior very closely.
31252 this option has some additional styles.
31257 styles are also supported by this variant.
31260 \begin_layout Description
31262 \begin_inset space ~
31265 (BibTeX) loads the package
31270 \begin_inset Index idx
31273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31280 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31283 \begin_layout Description
31285 \begin_inset space ~
31288 (BibTeX) loads the package
31293 \begin_inset Index idx
31296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31303 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31306 \begin_layout Standard
31315 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31317 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31326 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31328 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31329 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31331 Biblatex citation style
31334 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31340 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31344 \begin_layout Standard
31345 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31346 are available in the
31351 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31352 a name prefix such as
31353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31368 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31373 \begin_inset space \space{}
31377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31388 \begin_layout Standard
31389 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31395 \begin_inset space \space{}
31398 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31404 \begin_inset space \space{}
31408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31420 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31424 \begin_inset space ~
31432 \begin_inset space ~
31438 Here is a simple example where the text
31439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31443 \begin_inset space ~
31447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31450 appears after the reference:
31453 \begin_layout Quote
31455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31458 key "latexcompanion"
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 All styles except for
31471 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31481 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31485 \begin_layout Standard
31486 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31487 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31488 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31493 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31494 multi-citation (so-called
31495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31498 qualified citation lists
31499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31505 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31510 dialog will display three columns in the field
31517 \begin_inset space ~
31525 \begin_inset space ~
31533 \begin_inset space ~
31539 If you double-click on an item's
31542 \begin_inset space ~
31550 \begin_inset space ~
31555 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31558 General text before
31564 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31567 \begin_layout Section
31569 \begin_inset Index idx
31572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31589 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31593 \begin_inset space ~
31598 or the toolbar button
31605 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31606 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31607 by \SpecialChar LyX
31608 as the index entry.
31611 \begin_layout Standard
31612 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31615 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31617 \begin_inset space ~
31623 A light blue box labeled
31624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31635 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31636 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31640 \begin_layout Standard
31641 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31642 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31643 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31644 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31646 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31648 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31656 \begin_layout Subsection
31657 Grouping Index Entries
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31671 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31673 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31674 lists under the entry
31675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31683 First we create the entry
31684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31692 \begin_inset space ~
31696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31698 reference "subsec:Lists"
31703 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31704 \begin_inset space ~
31708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31710 reference "sec:Itemize"
31714 , we insert the command
31717 \begin_layout Standard
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31727 \begin_layout Standard
31733 \begin_layout Standard
31734 for the enumerated list in section
31735 \begin_inset space ~
31739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31741 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31749 The exclamation mark
31750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31757 marks the grouping levels.
31758 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31759 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31760 If we don't have an index entry for
31761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31768 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31771 \begin_layout Subsection
31773 \begin_inset Index idx
31776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31777 Index ! Page ranges
31785 \begin_layout Standard
31786 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31788 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31789 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31790 an index entry in section
31791 \begin_inset space ~
31795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31797 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31804 \begin_layout Standard
31807 Paragraph environments|(
31810 \begin_layout Standard
31811 and another entry at the end of section
31812 \begin_inset space ~
31816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31818 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31825 \begin_layout Standard
31828 Paragraph environments|)
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31856 respectively start and end the index range.
31857 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31858 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31859 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31860 An example is the index entry
31861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31864 Document ! Settings
31865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31871 \begin_layout Subsection
31873 \begin_inset Index idx
31876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31877 Index ! Cross referencing
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31886 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31887 We referred for example in the index entry
31888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31896 \begin_inset space ~
31900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31902 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31906 ) to the index entry
31907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31914 in the same section using the entry
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31920 GIF|see{Image formats}
31923 \begin_layout Standard
31924 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31926 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31927 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31930 \begin_layout Subsection
31932 \begin_inset Index idx
31935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31936 Index ! Entry order
31944 \begin_layout Standard
31945 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31946 follow the rules for the index order.
31947 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31953 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31955 \begin_inset space ~
31959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31961 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31970 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31971 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31996 \begin_inset Index idx
31999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32000 Dummy entries ! maïs
32006 \begin_inset Index idx
32009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32010 Dummy entries ! maître
32016 \begin_inset Index idx
32019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32020 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32025 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32026 maïs, maison, maître.
32027 To achieve this, we use the command
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32033 previous entry@current entry
32036 \begin_layout Standard
32037 In our case we want to have
32038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32053 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32056 \begin_layout Standard
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32063 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32064 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32066 See the next subsection for an example.
32069 \begin_layout Subsection
32071 \begin_inset Index idx
32074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32075 Index ! Entry layout
32083 \begin_layout Standard
32084 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32085 \begin_inset Index idx
32088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32091 This is an italic dummy entry
32096 You can also format the page number using the character
32097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32104 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32105 -command without a backslash.
32106 We can write for example
32109 \begin_layout Standard
32112 italic page number:|textit
32115 \begin_layout Standard
32116 to get the page number in italic.
32117 \begin_inset Index idx
32120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32121 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32126 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32127 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32145 \begin_inset space ~
32151 Have a look at section
32152 \begin_inset space ~
32156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32158 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32162 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32166 \begin_layout Standard
32167 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32175 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32179 to generate the index, see section
32180 \begin_inset space ~
32184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32186 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32195 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32200 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32201 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32204 key "latexcompanion"
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32218 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32220 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32221 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32222 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32223 If so, put the following in the preamble
32226 \begin_layout Standard
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32248 \begin_layout Standard
32249 in the index entry.
32250 \begin_inset Index idx
32253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32254 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32259 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32260 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32261 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32264 \begin_layout Standard
32265 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32266 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32267 a bold font for all index entries.
32268 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32280 documentation for details,
32281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32283 key "makeindex,xindy"
32291 \begin_layout Subsection
32293 \begin_inset Index idx
32296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32305 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32312 \begin_layout Standard
32313 If the index generation program
32317 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32318 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32322 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32323 distribution, is used.
32327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32332 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32333 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32334 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32335 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32336 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32346 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32348 dialog, see section
32349 \begin_inset space ~
32353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32355 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32360 The available options are listed and explained in
32361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32363 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32369 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32373 \begin_layout Standard
32374 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32375 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32379 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32383 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32384 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32387 \begin_layout Subsection
32391 \begin_layout Standard
32392 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32393 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32401 next to the standard index.
32403 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32404 that add this feature.
32411 \begin_inset Index idx
32414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32416 packages ! splitidx
32421 package to generate multiple indexes.
32422 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32428 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32438 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32439 style, but it also includes
32440 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32441 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32449 \begin_layout Standard
32450 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32451 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32454 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32457 and select the option
32459 Use multiple Indexes
32466 already contains the standard index
32467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32475 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32476 also appear as a heading) to the
32480 input field and press the
32485 The new index now also appears in the list.
32486 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32487 label color to the new index.
32490 \begin_layout Standard
32491 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32495 List/Contents/References
32501 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32502 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32503 are additional features:
32506 \begin_layout Itemize
32507 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32508 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32511 \begin_layout Itemize
32512 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32513 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32518 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32519 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32520 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32521 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32524 \begin_layout Itemize
32529 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32530 code in the name of the index.
32533 \begin_layout Section
32534 Nomenclature/Glossary
32535 \begin_inset Index idx
32538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32545 \begin_inset Index idx
32548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32579 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32586 \begin_layout Standard
32587 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32588 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32589 called nomenclature or glossary.
32592 \begin_layout Standard
32593 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32600 \begin_inset Index idx
32603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32611 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32613 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32620 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32624 \begin_layout Standard
32625 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32626 and then use the menu
32628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32634 \begin_inset space ~
32639 or the toolbar button
32642 arg "nomencl-insert"
32647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32658 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32662 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32663 The first is the term or
32667 that you wish to define.
32672 of the term or symbol.
32675 \begin_layout Standard
32676 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32684 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32685 code for nomenclature entries the option
32689 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32697 \begin_layout Subsection
32698 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32699 \begin_inset Index idx
32702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32703 Nomenclature ! Layout
32711 \begin_layout Standard
32712 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32716 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32723 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32731 \begin_inset Newline newline
32739 \begin_inset Newline newline
32745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32752 character starts/ends the formula.
32753 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32754 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32766 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32776 \begin_layout Standard
32777 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32778 syntax is given in section
32779 \begin_inset space ~
32783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32785 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32796 \begin_inset space ~
32801 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32803 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32808 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32815 in this document is:
32816 \begin_inset Newline newline
32821 dummy entry for the character
32826 \begin_inset Newline newline
32838 \begin_inset space ~
32848 font use the command
32877 \begin_layout Standard
32878 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32883 \begin_inset space \space{}
32887 \begin_inset Newline newline
32903 \begin_inset Newline newline
32906 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32907 This command will make the font of all symbols
32914 \begin_inset space ~
32922 \begin_layout Standard
32923 If the characters |
32924 \begin_inset space \space{}
32928 \begin_inset space \space{}
32932 \begin_inset space \space{}
32936 \begin_inset space \space{}
32940 \begin_inset space \space{}
32943 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32944 code they need to be escaped
32945 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32946 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32947 LatexCommand nomenclature
32948 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32949 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32957 \begin_layout Subsection
32958 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32959 \begin_inset Index idx
32962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32963 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32971 \begin_layout Standard
32972 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32973 -code of the symbol
32975 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32977 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32980 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32981 LatexCommand nomenclature
32983 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32991 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32995 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32996 LatexCommand nomenclature
32999 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33005 They will be sorted by
33006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33032 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33035 will be sorted before the
33039 since the character
33040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33047 is considered in sorting.
33050 \begin_layout Standard
33051 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33054 \begin_inset space ~
33059 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33060 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33062 For the example given, you can insert
33066 in this field for the
33067 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33074 will be located before
33075 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33081 \begin_layout Standard
33082 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33087 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33097 \begin_layout Subsection
33098 Nomenclature Options
33099 \begin_inset Index idx
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33103 Nomenclature ! Options
33109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33111 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33118 \begin_layout Standard
33123 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33124 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33127 \begin_layout Description
33128 refeq Appends the phrase
33129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33144 to every nomenclature entry, where
33150 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33153 \begin_layout Description
33154 refpage Appends the phrase
33155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33170 to every nomenclature entry, where
33176 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33179 \begin_layout Description
33180 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33183 \begin_layout Standard
33184 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33185 class options list in the
33187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33191 In this document the options
33198 \begin_layout Standard
33199 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33206 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33207 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33212 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33215 \begin_layout Description
33225 \begin_layout Description
33228 nomrefpage Like the
33235 \begin_layout Description
33238 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33247 \begin_layout Description
33251 \begin_inset space ~
33257 \begin_inset space ~
33262 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33265 \begin_layout Standard
33267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33274 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33275 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33279 \begin_layout Standard
33288 \begin_inset Newline newline
33294 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33298 \begin_inset space ~
33310 unskip, see equation
33313 \begin_inset Newline newline
33320 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33321 \begin_inset Newline newline
33327 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33331 \begin_inset space ~
33348 \begin_layout Standard
33349 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33352 \begin_inset space ~
33357 in the document settings under
33360 \begin_inset space ~
33368 \begin_layout Standard
33376 \begin_inset Newline newline
33380 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33384 \begin_inset space ~
33396 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33398 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33399 \begin_inset Newline newline
33406 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33407 \begin_inset Newline newline
33411 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33427 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33432 \begin_layout Subsection
33433 Printing the Nomenclature
33434 \begin_inset Index idx
33437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33438 Nomenclature ! Printing
33446 \begin_layout Standard
33447 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33450 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33466 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33467 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33468 You can choose between these settings:
33471 \begin_layout Description
33472 Default a space of 1
33473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33479 \begin_layout Description
33481 \begin_inset space ~
33485 \begin_inset space ~
33488 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33491 \begin_layout Description
33492 Custom custom space
33495 \begin_layout Standard
33496 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33505 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33513 For example, in order to change the name to
33517 , add the following line to the preamble:
33520 \begin_layout Standard
33533 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33537 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33538 \begin_inset Newline newline
33553 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33556 \begin_layout Subsection
33557 Nomenclature Program
33558 \begin_inset Index idx
33561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33562 Nomenclature ! Program
33568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33570 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33577 \begin_layout Standard
33583 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33584 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33586 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33591 by adding options, see section
33592 \begin_inset space ~
33596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33598 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33603 The available options are listed and explained in
33604 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33606 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33614 \begin_layout Section
33616 \begin_inset Index idx
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33626 \begin_inset Index idx
33629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33630 Document ! Branches
33636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33638 name "sec:Branches"
33645 \begin_layout Standard
33646 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33647 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33648 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33649 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33652 \begin_layout Standard
33653 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33654 allows you to put text into branches.
33655 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33656 To create a branch, either select the menu
33658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33659 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33662 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33664 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33671 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33672 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33673 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33674 and whether the name of the branch should
33675 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33676 (see below for an example).
33677 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33678 to the name of the other) and to add
33679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33691 \begin_inset space ~
33694 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33695 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33698 \begin_layout Standard
33699 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33700 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33705 where you can choose a branch.
33706 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33710 \begin_layout Standard
33711 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33712 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33715 \begin_layout Standard
33716 \begin_inset Branch Question
33720 \begin_layout Standard
33725 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33733 \begin_layout Standard
33734 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33743 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33759 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33762 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33763 Consider for example a file
33764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33771 which has the above branches.
33773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33780 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33804 branch were inactive,
33805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33820 branch was active, likewise
33821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33836 branch was active, and
33837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33840 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33844 if both branches were active.
33845 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33846 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33852 \begin_layout Standard
33853 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33859 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33860 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33864 \begin_inset space ~
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33873 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33877 \begin_layout Standard
33883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33890 branch is deactivated.
33896 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33902 \begin_layout Standard
33903 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33904 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33905 definitions for each branch.
33906 For example you can define for the question branch
33910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33911 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33912 -syntax, see section
33913 \begin_inset space ~
33917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33919 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33931 \begin_layout Standard
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33951 \begin_layout Standard
33952 and for the answer branch
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33965 \begin_layout Standard
33975 \begin_layout Standard
33976 \begin_inset Branch Question
33980 \begin_layout Standard
33984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34012 \begin_layout Standard
34013 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34017 \begin_layout Standard
34021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34049 \begin_layout Standard
34050 Now it is possible to use the
34054 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34061 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34064 commands to obtain conditional output.
34065 Here is an example formula where only the
34072 \begin_inset Formula
34074 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34082 \begin_layout Standard
34083 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34091 \begin_layout Standard
34092 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34098 \begin_inset space \space{}
34101 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34103 For this advanced usage, see the
34109 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34114 \begin_layout Section
34116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34118 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34123 \begin_inset Index idx
34126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34135 \begin_layout Standard
34138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34139 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34142 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34144 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34150 \begin_inset Index idx
34153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34155 packages ! hyperref
34160 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34161 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34162 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34163 part of the document.
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34168 The header information in the dialog tab
34172 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34173 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34174 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34175 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34179 \begin_inset space ~
34183 \begin_inset space ~
34188 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34189 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34190 and author entries.
34194 \begin_inset space ~
34198 \begin_inset space ~
34202 \begin_inset space ~
34207 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34210 \begin_layout Standard
34211 You can specify in the dialog tab
34215 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34220 \begin_inset space ~
34224 \begin_inset space ~
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34233 option allows long links to be split;
34236 \begin_inset space ~
34240 \begin_inset space ~
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34257 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34265 colors the different links.
34266 The default colors are:
34269 \begin_layout Labeling
34270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34275 for hyperlinks and URLs
34278 \begin_layout Labeling
34279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34287 \begin_layout Labeling
34288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 but you can change these in the field
34302 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34308 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34316 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34317 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34318 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34321 \begin_layout Standard
34326 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34327 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34328 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34338 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34339 when opening the PDF.
34341 \begin_inset space ~
34344 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34345 \begin_inset space ~
34348 1 will only display the sections.
34351 \begin_layout Standard
34352 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34353 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34359 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34360 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34370 \begin_layout Section
34372 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34376 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34383 \begin_layout Subsection
34386 \begin_inset Index idx
34389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34399 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34407 As \SpecialChar LyX
34408 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34409 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34410 commands and constructs,
34413 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34414 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34415 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34416 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34417 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34418 cannot support all packages and
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34424 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34425 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34429 Code box is created by the menu
34431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34433 \begin_inset space ~
34438 or by the toolbar button
34451 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34462 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34464 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34469 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34474 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34481 , you can write the command part
34487 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34488 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34492 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34493 Code box behind the word.
34494 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34495 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34500 \begin_inset Graphics
34501 filename clipart/ERT.png
34509 \begin_layout Standard
34513 \begin_layout Standard
34514 This is a line with a
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34541 \begin_layout Standard
34542 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34550 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34551 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34552 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34553 know that the command is finished.
34561 \begin_layout Subsection
34562 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34564 \begin_inset Argument 1
34567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34568 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34575 \begin_inset Index idx
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34588 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34595 \begin_layout Standard
34596 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34597 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34598 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34599 uses in the background.
34600 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34601 is based on commands, you can
34602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34610 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34611 any time if you know the right commands.
34612 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34613 is the end of the day.
34614 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34615 all caption labels bold.
34616 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34618 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34622 \begin_layout Standard
34623 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34625 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34627 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34630 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34640 \begin_layout Standard
34641 As result you find that the package
34646 \begin_inset Index idx
34649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34657 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34662 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34666 \begin_inset space ~
34674 \begin_layout Standard
34679 usepackage[options]{package name}
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34683 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34684 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34685 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34686 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34689 \begin_layout Standard
34690 In your case the package name is
34695 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34700 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34701 So you add the command
34704 \begin_layout Standard
34709 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34712 \begin_layout Standard
34713 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34718 For more commands provided by the
34722 package, have a look at its documentation,
34723 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34738 \begin_layout Standard
34739 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34741 For example if you use a
34745 class, you don't need the package
34749 , you can instead write
34752 \begin_layout Standard
34757 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34762 \begin_layout Standard
34763 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34764 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34765 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34772 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34775 \begin_layout Standard
34776 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34777 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34779 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34780 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34781 Code box as described in the previous
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34786 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34787 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34790 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34792 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34800 \begin_layout Standard
34801 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34807 \begin_layout Standard
34811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34821 \begin_inset Note Note
34824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34825 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34833 \begin_layout Left Header
34834 \begin_inset Argument 1
34837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34857 \begin_inset Note Note
34860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34861 defines the header line as described below
34869 \begin_layout Center Header
34870 \begin_inset Argument 1
34873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34882 \begin_layout Right Header
34883 \begin_inset Argument 1
34886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34907 \begin_layout Left Footer
34908 \begin_inset Argument 1
34911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34932 \begin_layout Center Footer
34933 \begin_inset Argument 1
34936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34948 \begin_inset Newline newline
34952 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34958 \begin_layout Right Footer
34959 \begin_inset Argument 1
34962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34984 \begin_layout Section
34985 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34988 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34993 \begin_inset Index idx
34996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34997 Document ! Header/Footer line
35003 \begin_inset Index idx
35006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35015 \begin_layout Standard
35016 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35031 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35037 \begin_inset space ~
35043 As a second step add in the menu
35045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35046 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35055 Custom Header/Footerlines
35058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35062 This module offers the following 6
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_layout Description
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35075 \begin_inset space ~
35079 \begin_inset space ~
35083 \begin_inset space ~
35087 \begin_inset space ~
35093 \begin_layout Description
35095 \begin_inset space ~
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35107 \begin_inset space ~
35111 \begin_inset space ~
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35119 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35122 \begin_layout Standard
35123 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35124 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35132 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35136 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35139 \begin_layout Standard
35140 \begin_inset Float figure
35147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35150 \begin_inset Tabular
35151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35153 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35155 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35175 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35204 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35215 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35219 The normal text on the page goes here.
35220 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35222 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35223 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35228 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35237 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35266 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35295 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35318 name "fig:Page-layout"
35322 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35335 \begin_layout Standard
35336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35344 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35353 is set to “Default”.
35354 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35363 \begin_layout Subsection
35367 \begin_layout Standard
35368 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35369 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35370 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35371 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35373 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35375 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35380 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35386 \begin_inset space ~
35394 \begin_layout Description
35397 thepage prints the current page number
35400 \begin_layout Description
35403 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35406 \begin_layout Description
35409 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35412 \begin_layout Description
35415 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35416 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35423 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35426 because it usually goes in a left header.
35429 \begin_layout Description
35432 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35433 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35435 It is normally used in the right header.
35438 \begin_layout Subsection
35439 Default header/footer
35442 \begin_layout Standard
35443 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35444 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35445 footer has the page number.
35446 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35447 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35448 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35451 \begin_inset space ~
35459 \begin_layout Subsection
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35465 Some pages are different.
35466 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35467 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35468 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35469 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35470 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35474 Header and footer decoration line
35477 \begin_layout Standard
35478 By default, you get a 0.4
35479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35482 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35483 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35495 in the following way:
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35505 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35508 \begin_layout Standard
35509 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35522 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35529 \begin_layout Standard
35530 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35532 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35533 \begin_inset space ~
35537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35548 Several header/footer lines
35551 \begin_layout Standard
35552 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35553 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35554 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35556 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35572 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35574 \begin_inset space ~
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35589 headheight}{height}
35592 \begin_layout Standard
35597 is a size in standard units (e.
35598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35602 \begin_inset space \space{}
35610 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35611 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35612 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35613 logfile with the menu
35615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35630 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35635 \begin_inset Index idx
35638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35640 packages ! fancyhdr
35646 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35647 for your header/footer.
35650 \begin_layout Subsection
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35655 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35656 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35657 This example consists of the following definition:
35660 \begin_layout Description
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35671 , empty optional argument
35674 \begin_layout Description
35676 \begin_inset space ~
35679 Header empty, empty optional argument
35682 \begin_layout Description
35684 \begin_inset space ~
35693 in the optional argument
35696 \begin_layout Description
35698 \begin_inset space ~
35707 in the optional argument
35710 \begin_layout Description
35712 \begin_inset space ~
35725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35729 \begin_inset Newline newline
35733 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35740 in the optional argument
35743 \begin_layout Description
35745 \begin_inset space ~
35754 , empty optional argument
35757 \begin_layout Description
35760 headrulewidth set to 2
35761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35768 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35769 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35775 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35786 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35792 \begin_layout Standard
35796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35800 pagestyle{headings}
35806 \begin_inset Note Note
35809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35810 switches back to page style with the default headings
35818 \begin_layout Section
35819 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35822 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35827 \begin_inset Index idx
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35837 \begin_inset Index idx
35840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35849 \begin_layout Standard
35851 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35852 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35853 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35856 \begin_layout Subsection
35860 \begin_layout Standard
35861 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35867 \begin_inset Index idx
35870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35872 packages ! preview-latex
35877 (on some systems named simply
35882 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35891 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35893 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35901 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35902 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35903 -package are automatically
35904 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35908 \begin_layout Subsection
35912 \begin_layout Standard
35913 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35914 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35916 activate the option
35919 \begin_inset space ~
35926 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35936 \begin_inset space ~
35939 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35964 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35967 \begin_layout Standard
35968 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35973 \begin_inset space ~
35981 \begin_inset space ~
35989 \begin_layout Standard
35990 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35991 and when you finish
35995 \begin_layout Standard
35996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36004 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36005 generated by activating the option
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36014 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36022 \begin_layout Subsection
36023 Selected document parts
36026 \begin_layout Standard
36027 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36028 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36029 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36030 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36032 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36038 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36039 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36040 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36043 \begin_layout Standard
36044 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36051 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36063 is explained in section
36065 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36070 \begin_inset space ~
36080 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36081 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36082 the final rotated boxes,
36083 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36084 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36086 Here is the result:
36089 \begin_layout Standard
36090 \begin_inset Preview
36092 \begin_layout Standard
36097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36101 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36107 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36117 height_special "totalheight"
36122 backgroundcolor "none"
36125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36150 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36156 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36178 \begin_layout Standard
36179 Previewing works also for colors.
36180 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36199 is explained in section
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36219 \begin_layout Standard
36220 \begin_inset Preview
36222 \begin_layout Standard
36226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36250 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36269 \begin_layout Standard
36270 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36276 \begin_layout Standard
36277 If \SpecialChar LyX
36278 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36279 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36280 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36281 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36282 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36283 the \SpecialChar TeX
36285 If \SpecialChar LyX
36286 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36287 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36289 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36290 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36291 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36294 \begin_layout Subsection
36299 \begin_layout Standard
36300 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36301 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36304 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36311 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36313 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36315 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36316 's main window, then only this selection
36317 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36318 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36319 the source view window.
36324 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36325 ; but note that if you have
36326 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36328 not just the one which is open at the time.
36331 \begin_layout Section
36332 Advanced Find and Replace
36333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36335 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36340 \begin_inset Index idx
36343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36350 \begin_inset Index idx
36353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36362 \begin_layout Subsection
36366 \begin_layout Standard
36367 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36368 allows for searching of complex,
36369 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36371 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36372 The key-features are:
36375 \begin_layout Itemize
36376 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36377 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36378 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36382 \begin_layout Itemize
36383 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36384 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36385 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36386 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36389 \begin_layout Itemize
36390 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36391 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36392 outside of mathematics environments
36395 \begin_layout Itemize
36396 Search may be widened to a specific
36401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36408 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36409 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36416 \begin_layout Itemize
36417 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36418 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36426 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36429 \begin_layout Subsection
36433 \begin_layout Standard
36434 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36449 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36452 ) or the toolbar button
36455 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36461 Advanced Find and Replace
36466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36470 \begin_layout Standard
36476 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36480 \begin_inset space ~
36485 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36488 arg "paragraph-break"
36492 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36493 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36497 arg "paragraph-break"
36500 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36504 searches backwards.
36507 \begin_layout Standard
36511 \begin_inset space ~
36516 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36530 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36534 Searching for mathematics
36537 \begin_layout Standard
36538 Mathematical formulas, such as
36539 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36542 or something more complex like
36543 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36546 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36551 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36552 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36553 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36554 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36564 \begin_layout Standard
36565 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36566 This is done by switching to the
36570 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36575 This way, entering in the
36582 \begin_layout Itemize
36583 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36584 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36587 \begin_layout Itemize
36588 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36589 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36592 \begin_layout Itemize
36593 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36594 of it only within section headings.
36595 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36596 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36600 \begin_layout Itemize
36601 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36602 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36609 \begin_layout Standard
36610 The entries made in the
36614 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36617 \begin_inset space ~
36623 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36627 button or alternatively press
36630 arg "paragraph-break"
36637 while the cursor is in the
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36648 \begin_layout Standard
36649 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36651 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36655 \begin_layout Itemize
36656 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36657 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36665 with its typewriter version
36666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36680 \begin_layout Itemize
36681 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36687 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36699 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36706 (you may want to enable the
36709 \begin_inset space ~
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36722 options and disable the
36730 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36738 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36739 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36743 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36746 , or occurrences of
36747 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36751 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36757 \begin_layout Subsection
36761 \begin_layout Standard
36762 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36767 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36771 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36781 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36787 This is done with the context menu
36789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36790 Insert Regular Expression
36792 while the cursor is in the
36797 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36798 expression matching rules
36802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36803 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36813 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36814 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36820 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36821 same text in the document.
36822 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36823 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36826 \begin_layout Enumerate
36827 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36832 editor the fraction
36833 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36837 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36840 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36841 fractions with the given denominator.
36844 \begin_layout Enumerate
36845 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36857 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36862 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36863 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36864 Also, by inserting a
36865 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36868 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36869 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36873 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36874 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36875 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36878 , and referring back to them through
36879 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36883 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36887 For example, try searching with the regexp
36888 \begin_inset Newline newline
36891 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36894 \begin_inset Newline newline
36897 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36900 \begin_layout Standard
36901 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36905 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36913 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36914 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36915 sub-expressions is absolute.
36917 \begin_inset space ~
36921 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36924 always refers to the first occurrence of
36925 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36928 in all entered regexps.
36936 \begin_layout Section
36938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36940 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36945 \begin_inset Index idx
36948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36957 \begin_layout Standard
36959 has a built-in spell checker.
36962 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36969 key or the toolbar button
36972 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36975 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36976 beginning of the currently selected text.
36977 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36978 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36979 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36980 scrolled so that it is visible.
36981 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36982 n, if any could be found.
36983 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36987 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36988 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36991 \begin_layout Standard
36992 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36999 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37000 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37002 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37003 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37014 arg "dialog-show character"
37017 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37019 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37022 \begin_layout Standard
37023 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37024 can be downloaded from here:
37025 \begin_inset Newline newline
37029 \begin_inset Flex URL
37032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37034 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37040 \begin_inset Newline newline
37044 \begin_inset space ~
37047 files for each language.
37048 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37049 \begin_inset space ~
37052 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37053 's installation subfolder
37061 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37063 \begin_inset Newline newline
37066 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37067 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37068 but in most cases these are
37084 is the language code.
37087 \begin_layout Subsection
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37094 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37095 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37103 you can set the following things:
37106 \begin_layout Description
37108 \begin_inset space ~
37111 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37112 should use for spell checking.
37113 Depending on your platform,
37123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37124 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37125 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37143 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37146 \begin_layout Description
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37151 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37152 will always use the given language
37153 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37156 \begin_layout Description
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37161 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37167 \begin_inset space \space{}
37171 This should normally not be needed.
37174 \begin_layout Description
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37180 \begin_inset space ~
37183 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37195 \begin_layout Description
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37200 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37201 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37202 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37203 appear in a context menu.
37204 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37208 \begin_layout Description
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37214 \begin_inset space ~
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37221 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37225 \begin_layout Section
37227 \begin_inset Index idx
37230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37239 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37248 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37249 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37261 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37271 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37273 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37274 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37275 which are available for many languages.
37278 \begin_layout Standard
37279 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37280 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37284 \begin_layout Subsection
37285 Setting up the thesaurus
37288 \begin_layout Standard
37297 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37301 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37306 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37320 For instance, the US English files are named:
37323 \begin_layout Itemize
37327 \begin_layout Itemize
37331 \begin_layout Standard
37340 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37341 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37344 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37345 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37346 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37353 ) to the path where they are installed.
37357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37358 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37359 ies, typical locations are
37365 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37369 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37373 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37376 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37382 LibreOffice-<Version>
37389 On the Mac, the default location is
37391 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37392 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37393 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37394 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37395 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37396 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37404 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37405 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37406 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37410 \begin_layout Standard
37411 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37412 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37414 \begin_inset Newline newline
37418 \begin_inset Flex URL
37421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37423 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37431 \begin_layout Standard
37432 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37433 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37436 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37437 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37439 \begin_inset space ~
37444 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37446 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37447 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37451 \begin_layout Standard
37452 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37454 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37457 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37463 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37466 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37467 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37476 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37477 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37484 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37487 \begin_layout Subsection
37488 Using the thesaurus
37491 \begin_layout Standard
37492 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37497 or the toolbar button
37500 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37503 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37505 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37507 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37508 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37509 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37518 ), related terms (such as
37521 \begin_inset space ~
37530 ), compounds (such as
37533 \begin_inset space ~
37542 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37551 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37554 \begin_layout Standard
37555 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37556 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37560 \begin_layout Standard
37561 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37562 the dictionary, such as the above
37566 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37571 \begin_inset space \space{}
37574 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37575 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37576 For example, looking up the word form
37580 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37585 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37590 \begin_inset space \space{}
37601 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37602 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37603 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37606 \begin_layout Section
37608 \begin_inset Index idx
37611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37618 \begin_inset Index idx
37621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37622 Document ! Change Tracking
37628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37630 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37637 \begin_layout Standard
37638 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37639 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37640 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37641 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37643 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37648 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37658 \begin_layout Standard
37659 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37673 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37674 You can change the color in
37676 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37677 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37688 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37694 \begin_inset Index idx
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37698 Color ! Change tracking
37703 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37704 's status bar when the
37705 cursor is in changed text.
37706 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37709 arg "changes-merge"
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37718 \begin_inset Index idx
37721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37730 \begin_layout Standard
37731 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37737 \begin_layout Standard
37738 \begin_inset Graphics
37739 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37748 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37754 \begin_layout Standard
37755 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37758 \begin_layout Standard
37759 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37765 \begin_layout Standard
37766 \begin_inset Tabular
37767 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37768 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37769 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37770 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37780 arg "changes-track"
37788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37794 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37799 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37819 arg "changes-output"
37827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37835 \begin_inset space ~
37838 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37848 \begin_inset space ~
37857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37878 Jumps to the next change
37884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37893 arg "change-accept"
37901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37912 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37923 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37932 arg "change-reject"
37940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37951 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37953 \begin_inset space ~
37962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37971 arg "changes-merge"
37979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37987 \begin_inset space ~
37990 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37992 \begin_inset space ~
38001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38010 arg "all-changes-accept"
38018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38029 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38035 \begin_inset space ~
38044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38053 arg "all-changes-reject"
38061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38069 \begin_inset space ~
38072 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38074 \begin_inset space ~
38078 \begin_inset space ~
38087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38111 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38113 \begin_inset space ~
38122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38145 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38147 \begin_inset space ~
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38164 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38170 \begin_layout Standard
38171 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38191 \begin_layout Standard
38192 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38193 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38194 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38195 the next change after the current cursor position.
38196 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38197 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38198 step to the next change.
38199 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38202 \begin_layout Standard
38203 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38204 to describe a change.
38207 \begin_layout Standard
38209 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38210 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38216 \begin_inset Index idx
38219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38227 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38229 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38236 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38242 \begin_layout Section
38243 Comparison of Documents
38244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38246 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38251 \begin_inset Index idx
38254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38255 Comparison of documents
38263 \begin_layout Standard
38264 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38267 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38271 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38272 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38274 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38276 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38280 \begin_inset space ~
38284 \begin_inset space ~
38288 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38305 \begin_inset space ~
38309 \begin_inset space ~
38313 \begin_inset space ~
38317 \begin_inset space ~
38322 enables the change tracking option
38325 \begin_inset space ~
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38333 \begin_inset space ~
38338 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38341 \begin_layout Section
38342 International Support
38343 \begin_inset Index idx
38346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38347 International support
38355 \begin_layout Standard
38356 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38357 with any language you want.
38358 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38359 up \SpecialChar LyX
38361 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38363 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38371 \begin_layout Standard
38372 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38373 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38374 \begin_inset space ~
38378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38380 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38387 \begin_layout Subsection
38389 \begin_inset Index idx
38392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38399 \begin_inset Index idx
38402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 Document ! Settings
38409 \begin_inset Index idx
38412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38413 Document ! Language
38421 \begin_layout Standard
38424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38425 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38428 dialog lets you set
38430 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38435 \begin_layout Standard
38440 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38450 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38451 For details about the different encoding options see section
38452 \begin_inset space ~
38456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38458 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38465 \begin_layout Subsection
38466 Keyboard mapping configuration
38467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38469 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38476 \begin_layout Standard
38477 If you have for example a U.
38478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38481 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38482 can use an alternate keymap.
38483 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38489 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38493 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38494 \begin_inset space ~
38498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38500 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38505 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38506 which one you want to use.
38509 \begin_layout Standard
38510 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38511 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38512 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38516 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38517 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38518 one to support the characters you want.
38519 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38526 \begin_layout Chapter
38529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38531 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38538 \begin_layout Standard
38539 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38540 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38541 topic inside the user's guide.
38544 \begin_layout Section
38546 \begin_inset Index idx
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38558 \begin_layout Standard
38563 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38566 \begin_layout Subsection
38570 \begin_layout Standard
38571 Creates a new document.
38574 \begin_layout Subsection
38578 \begin_layout Standard
38579 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38580 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38581 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38583 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38584 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38590 \begin_layout Subsection
38594 \begin_layout Standard
38598 \begin_layout Subsection
38602 \begin_layout Standard
38603 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38604 Click there on a file to open it.
38607 \begin_layout Subsection
38609 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38613 \begin_layout Standard
38615 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38616 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38620 \begin_layout Subsection
38624 \begin_layout Standard
38625 Closes the current document.
38628 \begin_layout Subsection
38632 \begin_layout Standard
38633 Closes all opened documents.
38636 \begin_layout Subsection
38640 \begin_layout Standard
38641 Saves the actual document.
38644 \begin_layout Subsection
38648 \begin_layout Standard
38649 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38650 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38654 \begin_layout Subsection
38656 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38660 \begin_layout Standard
38662 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38663 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38669 \begin_layout Subsection
38673 \begin_layout Standard
38674 Saves all opened documents.
38677 \begin_layout Subsection
38681 \begin_layout Standard
38682 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38685 \begin_layout Subsection
38689 \begin_layout Standard
38690 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38691 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38692 It is described in the section
38694 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38699 Additional Features
38704 \begin_layout Subsection
38708 \begin_layout Standard
38709 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38710 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38712 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38713 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38717 \begin_layout Standard
38718 When using the menu entry
38721 \begin_inset space ~
38726 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38738 \begin_inset space ~
38743 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38744 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38747 \begin_layout Subsection
38749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38751 name "subsec:Export"
38758 \begin_layout Standard
38759 You can export your document to various file formats.
38760 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38762 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38763 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38764 during its configuration.
38767 \begin_layout Standard
38768 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38770 \begin_inset space ~
38774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38776 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38783 \begin_layout Description
38789 \begin_inset space ~
38792 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38794 \begin_inset space ~
38797 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38798 \begin_inset Newline newline
38801 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38802 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38806 \begin_layout Description
38807 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38813 \begin_layout Description
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38818 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38824 \begin_layout Description
38825 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38826 's native DVI-format.
38827 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38828 files paths or file names in your document.
38830 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38837 \begin_layout Description
38838 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38839 in files paths or file names
38842 \begin_layout Description
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38851 ) DVI-format using the program
38853 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38856 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38860 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38868 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38876 \begin_layout Description
38878 \begin_inset space ~
38881 (cropped) the same as
38885 but with cropped page margins.
38888 \begin_layout Description
38890 \begin_inset space ~
38893 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38897 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38902 \begin_layout Description
38906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38914 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38922 \begin_layout Description
38924 \begin_inset space ~
38928 \begin_inset space ~
38931 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38935 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38943 \begin_layout Description
38947 \begin_inset space ~
38956 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38957 source that is compilable with the program
38959 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38963 \begin_layout Description
38967 \begin_inset space ~
38972 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38973 source, additionally all images used in the document
38974 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38978 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38981 \begin_layout Description
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38990 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38991 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38992 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39000 \begin_layout Description
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39013 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39014 source that is compilable with the program
39020 \begin_layout Description
39022 \begin_inset space ~
39026 \begin_inset space ~
39033 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39034 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39040 \begin_layout Description
39042 \begin_inset space ~
39045 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39046 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39052 \begin_inset space \space{}
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39076 represent the version number)
39079 \begin_layout Description
39081 \begin_inset space ~
39085 \begin_inset space ~
39088 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39089 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39090 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39094 \begin_layout Description
39095 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39096 's internal XHTML engine
39099 \begin_layout Description
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39105 \begin_inset space ~
39109 \begin_inset space ~
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39116 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39121 For the conversion the program
39130 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39133 \begin_layout Description
39134 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39139 \begin_layout Description
39141 \begin_inset space ~
39144 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39146 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39149 For the conversion the program
39158 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39161 \begin_layout Description
39163 \begin_inset space ~
39166 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39167 For the conversion the program
39176 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39179 \begin_layout Description
39181 \begin_inset space ~
39184 (cropped) the same as
39187 \begin_inset space ~
39192 but with cropped page margins
39195 \begin_layout Description
39199 \begin_inset space ~
39204 PDF-format using the program
39208 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39211 \begin_layout Description
39215 \begin_inset space ~
39219 \begin_inset space ~
39227 \begin_inset space ~
39232 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39237 \begin_inset space \space{}
39240 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39244 \begin_layout Description
39248 \begin_inset space ~
39253 PDF-format using the program
39255 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39258 , produces PDF-files directly
39261 \begin_layout Description
39265 \begin_inset space ~
39270 PDF-format using the program
39274 , produces PDF-files directly
39277 \begin_layout Description
39281 \begin_inset space ~
39286 PDF-format using the program
39290 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39293 \begin_layout Description
39297 \begin_inset space ~
39302 PDF-format using the program
39307 , produces PDF-files directly
39310 \begin_layout Description
39314 \begin_inset space ~
39322 \begin_layout Description
39326 \begin_inset space ~
39330 \begin_inset space ~
39335 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39336 and then exported as text using the program
39341 \begin_layout Description
39346 PostScript format using the program
39354 options see section
39355 \begin_inset space ~
39359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39361 reference "subsec:General-output"
39368 \begin_layout Description
39369 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39370 source and also code in the statistical programming
39384 it is possible to use
39388 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39392 \begin_layout Standard
39393 If one of the menu entries
39400 \begin_inset space ~
39409 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39411 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39413 \begin_inset space ~
39417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39419 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39424 \begin_inset Index idx
39427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39428 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39437 \begin_layout Subsection
39441 \begin_layout Standard
39442 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39443 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39446 \begin_inset space ~
39450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39452 reference "sec:Paths"
39457 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39466 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39467 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39468 's preferences as described in section
39469 \begin_inset space ~
39473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39475 reference "subsec:Converters"
39482 \begin_layout Subsection
39483 New and Close Window
39486 \begin_layout Standard
39487 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39491 \begin_layout Subsection
39495 \begin_layout Standard
39496 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39499 \begin_layout Section
39501 \begin_inset Index idx
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39513 \begin_layout Subsection
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39518 Described in section
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39525 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39532 \begin_layout Subsection
39533 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39536 \begin_layout Standard
39537 Described in section
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39544 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39551 \begin_layout Subsection
39555 \begin_layout Standard
39556 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39557 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39560 \begin_layout Subsection
39564 \begin_layout Standard
39565 Selects the whole document.
39568 \begin_layout Subsection
39569 Find & Replace (Quick)
39572 \begin_layout Standard
39573 Described in section
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39580 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39587 \begin_layout Subsection
39588 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39591 \begin_layout Standard
39592 Described in section
39593 \begin_inset space ~
39597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39599 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39606 \begin_layout Subsection
39607 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39610 \begin_layout Standard
39611 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39615 \begin_layout Subsection
39617 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39621 \begin_layout Standard
39623 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39624 Described in section
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39631 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39640 \begin_layout Subsection
39642 \begin_inset Index idx
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39646 Paragraph ! Settings
39654 \begin_layout Standard
39655 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39656 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39661 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39662 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39668 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39669 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39671 \begin_inset space ~
39677 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39681 \begin_layout Subsection
39683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39687 \begin_layout Standard
39689 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39690 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39695 \begin_layout Enumerate
39697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39698 Customize text properties by means of the
39704 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39707 ; this is described in section
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39714 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39721 \begin_layout Enumerate
39723 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39724 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39726 Apply last settings
39729 \begin_layout Enumerate
39731 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39732 Change the casing of selected text (
39747 \begin_layout Subsection
39749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39753 \begin_layout Standard
39755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39756 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39757 text styles (in the case of this document:
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39785 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39794 \begin_layout Subsection
39795 Table and Rows & Columns
39798 \begin_layout Standard
39799 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39800 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39801 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39804 \begin_layout Subsection
39808 \begin_layout Standard
39809 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39810 It will dissolve this inset.
39811 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39815 \begin_layout Subsection
39819 \begin_layout Standard
39820 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39821 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39824 \begin_layout Subsection
39825 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39829 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39831 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39832 \begin_inset space ~
39836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39838 reference "sec:Nesting"
39843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39845 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39852 \begin_layout Section
39854 \begin_inset Index idx
39857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39866 \begin_layout Standard
39867 At the bottom of the
39871 menu the opened documents are listed.
39874 \begin_layout Subsection
39875 Open/Close all Insets
39878 \begin_layout Standard
39879 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39882 \begin_layout Subsection
39883 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39886 \begin_layout Standard
39887 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39890 \begin_layout Standard
39891 Math macros are described in the
39898 \begin_layout Subsection
39902 \begin_layout Standard
39903 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39910 reference "sec:Navigating"
39915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39917 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39924 \begin_layout Subsection
39928 \begin_layout Standard
39929 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39931 \begin_inset space ~
39935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39937 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39944 \begin_layout Subsection
39948 \begin_layout Standard
39949 Opens a window showing console messages.
39950 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39955 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39956 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39957 is processing the document.
39960 \begin_layout Subsection
39962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39964 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39969 \begin_inset Index idx
39972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39981 \begin_layout Standard
39982 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39984 All toolbars and the
39987 \begin_inset space ~
39992 can be turned on and off.
39997 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40021 \begin_inset space ~
40026 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40030 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40037 \begin_layout Standard
40042 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40046 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40047 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40048 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40049 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40050 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40053 \begin_layout Standard
40055 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40062 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40069 \begin_layout Subsection
40073 \begin_layout Standard
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40085 \begin_inset space ~
40089 \begin_inset space ~
40093 \begin_inset space ~
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40102 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40103 's main window vertically while
40106 \begin_inset space ~
40110 \begin_inset space ~
40114 \begin_inset space ~
40118 \begin_inset space ~
40122 \begin_inset space ~
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40131 will split it horizontally.
40132 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40133 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40134 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40135 three or more documents at the same time.
40136 To close a split view, use the menu
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40151 \begin_layout Subsection
40155 \begin_layout Standard
40156 Closes a split view.
40159 \begin_layout Subsection
40163 \begin_layout Standard
40164 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40165 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40166 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40167 's main window fullscreen.
40168 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40169 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40172 \begin_layout Section
40174 \begin_inset Index idx
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 \begin_layout Subsection
40190 \begin_layout Standard
40191 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40198 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40209 \begin_layout Subsection
40211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40213 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 Here you can insert the following characters:
40224 \begin_layout Description
40229 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40232 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40233 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40234 -packages you have installed.
40235 You can get a complete display by checking
40238 \begin_inset space ~
40244 \begin_inset Newline newline
40248 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40256 Not all characters will be visible in the
40260 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40261 dialog (see section
40262 \begin_inset space ~
40266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40268 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40272 ) can display every character.
40280 \begin_layout Description
40281 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40285 \begin_layout Description
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40294 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40301 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40308 \begin_layout Description
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40313 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40316 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40317 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40323 \begin_layout Description
40325 \begin_inset space ~
40328 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40332 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40338 \begin_layout Description
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40343 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40347 \begin_layout Description
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40352 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40356 \begin_layout Description
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40361 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40367 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40373 \begin_layout Description
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40378 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40382 \begin_layout Description
40384 \begin_inset space ~
40388 \begin_inset Index idx
40391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40398 \begin_inset Index idx
40401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40402 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40407 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40408 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40410 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40416 \begin_inset Index idx
40419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40427 \begin_inset Newline newline
40430 More information about this feature can be found in the
40436 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40442 \begin_layout Description
40443 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40445 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40446 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40450 \begin_layout Subsection
40454 \begin_layout Standard
40455 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40458 \begin_layout Description
40459 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40460 \begin_inset script superscript
40462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40471 \begin_layout Description
40472 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40473 \begin_inset script subscript
40475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40484 \begin_layout Description
40486 \begin_inset space ~
40489 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40496 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40503 \begin_layout Description
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40508 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40515 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40522 \begin_layout Description
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40527 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40534 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40541 \begin_layout Description
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40546 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40552 \begin_inset space \space{}
40555 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40556 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40565 To insert a fraction use the command
40570 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40574 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40583 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40590 \begin_layout Description
40592 \begin_inset space ~
40595 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40596 \begin_inset space ~
40600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40602 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40609 \begin_layout Description
40611 \begin_inset space ~
40614 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40621 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40628 \begin_layout Description
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40633 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40640 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40647 \begin_layout Description
40648 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40655 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40662 \begin_layout Description
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40667 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40674 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40681 \begin_layout Description
40683 \begin_inset space ~
40686 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40693 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40700 \begin_layout Description
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40709 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40718 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40725 for a usage example.
40728 \begin_layout Description
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40737 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40738 \begin_inset space ~
40742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40744 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40751 \begin_layout Description
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40756 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40757 as described in section
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40764 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40771 \begin_layout Description
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40776 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40777 \begin_inset space ~
40781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40783 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40790 \begin_layout Description
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40795 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40796 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40798 \begin_inset space ~
40802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40804 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40811 \begin_layout Description
40813 \begin_inset space ~
40816 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40817 \begin_inset space ~
40821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40823 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40830 \begin_layout Description
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40839 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40846 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40853 \begin_layout Subsection
40855 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40859 \begin_layout Standard
40861 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40862 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40863 The submenu allows you to insert
40866 \begin_layout Description
40868 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40873 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40876 \begin_layout Description
40878 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40887 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40891 \begin_layout Description
40893 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40898 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40901 \begin_layout Description
40903 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40908 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40911 \begin_layout Description
40913 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40922 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40926 \begin_layout Description
40928 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40933 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40936 \begin_layout Description
40938 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40951 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40954 \begin_layout Description
40956 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40961 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40963 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40964 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40970 \begin_layout Description
40972 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40977 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40979 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40980 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40986 \begin_layout Description
40988 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40989 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40990 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40991 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40994 \begin_layout Subsection
40997 List/Contents/References
41000 \begin_layout Standard
41001 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41026 are described in section
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41033 reference "sec:toc"
41042 is described in section
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41049 reference "sec:Index"
41057 is described in section
41058 \begin_inset space ~
41062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41064 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41070 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41073 is described in section
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41080 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41087 \begin_layout Subsection
41091 \begin_layout Standard
41092 To insert floats, as described in section
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41099 reference "sec:Floats"
41103 and in detail the chapter
41110 \begin_inset space ~
41118 \begin_layout Subsection
41122 \begin_layout Standard
41123 To insert notes, described in section
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41130 reference "sec:Notes"
41137 \begin_layout Subsection
41141 \begin_layout Standard
41142 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41144 Branches are described in section
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41151 reference "sec:Branches"
41158 \begin_layout Subsection
41162 \begin_layout Standard
41163 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41164 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41166 An example is the document class
41167 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41177 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41186 with three custom insets.
41189 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41193 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41199 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41202 \begin_layout Subsection
41204 \begin_inset Index idx
41207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41216 \begin_layout Standard
41217 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41219 For more information see chapter
41221 External Document Parts
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41230 \begin_layout Subsection
41232 \begin_inset Index idx
41235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41244 \begin_layout Standard
41245 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41246 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_layout Subsection
41265 \begin_layout Standard
41270 dialog as described in section
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41277 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41284 \begin_layout Subsection
41288 \begin_layout Standard
41293 as described in section
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41300 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41307 \begin_layout Subsection
41311 \begin_layout Standard
41316 as described in section
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41323 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41330 \begin_layout Subsection
41332 \begin_inset Index idx
41335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41342 \begin_inset Index idx
41345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41346 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41354 \begin_layout Standard
41355 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41356 Floats are described in section
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41363 reference "sec:Floats"
41367 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41369 Multi-page Captions
41374 \begin_inset space ~
41382 \begin_layout Subsection
41386 \begin_layout Standard
41387 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41394 reference "sec:Index"
41401 \begin_layout Subsection
41405 \begin_layout Standard
41406 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41413 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41420 \begin_layout Subsection
41424 \begin_layout Standard
41425 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41426 Tables are described in section
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41433 reference "sec:Tables"
41437 and in detail in the chapter
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41452 \begin_layout Subsection
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41462 Graphics are described in section
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41469 reference "sec:Graphics"
41476 \begin_layout Subsection
41480 \begin_layout Standard
41481 Inserts a URL as described in section
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41488 reference "subsec:URLs"
41495 \begin_layout Subsection
41499 \begin_layout Standard
41500 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41507 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41514 \begin_layout Subsection
41518 \begin_layout Standard
41519 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41526 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41533 \begin_layout Subsection
41537 \begin_layout Standard
41538 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41545 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41552 \begin_layout Subsection
41555 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41558 \begin_layout Standard
41559 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41560 environments of the same type.
41562 \begin_inset space ~
41566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41568 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41572 for an explanation.
41575 \begin_layout Subsection
41579 \begin_layout Standard
41580 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41581 title or caption of a float.
41582 Inserts a short title as described in section
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41589 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41596 \begin_layout Subsection
41601 \begin_layout Standard
41602 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41603 Code box as described in section
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41610 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41617 \begin_layout Subsection
41619 \begin_inset Index idx
41622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41631 \begin_layout Standard
41632 Inserts a program listings box.
41633 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41635 Program Code Listings
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41648 \begin_layout Subsection
41650 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41654 \begin_layout Standard
41656 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41657 Inserts the actual date.
41658 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41665 \begin_layout Subsection
41669 \begin_layout Standard
41670 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41677 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41684 \begin_layout Section
41686 \begin_inset Index idx
41689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41698 \begin_layout Standard
41699 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41703 of the current document.
41704 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41707 \begin_layout Subsection
41711 \begin_layout Standard
41712 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41713 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41714 to jump, for example, between section
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41719 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41723 2.5 and use the submenu
41726 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_inset space ~
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41747 \begin_inset space ~
41753 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41757 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41763 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41766 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41769 \begin_layout Standard
41770 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41779 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41787 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41790 \begin_layout Subsection
41791 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41794 \begin_layout Standard
41795 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41799 \begin_layout Subsection
41803 \begin_layout Standard
41804 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41805 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41806 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41810 \begin_inset space ~
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_layout Subsection
41826 \begin_layout Standard
41827 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41830 The \SpecialChar LyX
41831 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41833 \begin_inset space ~
41841 \begin_inset space ~
41846 manual for a detailed description.
41849 \begin_layout Section
41851 \begin_inset Index idx
41854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41863 \begin_layout Subsection
41867 \begin_layout Standard
41868 Change Tracking is described in section
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41875 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41882 \begin_layout Subsection
41890 \begin_layout Standard
41891 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41892 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41893 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41895 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41896 to the clipboard or update the view.
41897 \begin_inset Newline newline
41900 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41904 \begin_layout Standard
41907 Open Containing Directory
41909 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41910 's temporary folder for the document.
41911 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41912 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41913 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41914 For example some journals require to send the
41918 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41922 \begin_layout Subsection
41923 Start Appendix Here
41926 \begin_layout Standard
41927 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41928 as described in section
41929 \begin_inset space ~
41933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41935 reference "sec:Appendices"
41942 \begin_layout Subsection
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41950 \begin_layout Standard
41951 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41952 default output format for the document (menu
41954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41956 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41958 \begin_inset space ~
41962 \begin_inset space ~
41968 \begin_inset space ~
41972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41974 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41978 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41981 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41982 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41984 \begin_inset space ~
41987 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41989 \begin_inset space ~
41992 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41994 \begin_inset space ~
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42004 \begin_inset space ~
42008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42010 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42014 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42015 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42017 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42018 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42023 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42025 \begin_inset space ~
42028 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42038 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42043 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42044 when it is first configured.
42045 The default output format is
42048 \begin_inset space ~
42056 \begin_layout Subsection
42057 View (Other Formats)
42060 \begin_layout Standard
42061 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42062 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42063 actual document with an external program.
42064 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42065 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42066 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42068 All possible formats are listed in section
42069 \begin_inset space ~
42073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42075 reference "subsec:Export"
42080 You should at least see the menu entry
42085 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42087 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42089 \begin_inset space ~
42093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42095 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42100 \begin_inset Index idx
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42113 \begin_layout Standard
42114 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42115 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42118 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42120 \begin_inset space ~
42123 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42125 \begin_inset space ~
42128 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42138 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42143 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42144 when it is first configured.
42147 \begin_layout Subsection
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42155 \begin_layout Standard
42156 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42157 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42160 \begin_layout Subsection
42161 Update (Other Formats)
42164 \begin_layout Standard
42165 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42166 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42169 \begin_layout Subsection
42170 View Master Document
42173 \begin_layout Standard
42174 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42190 \begin_inset space ~
42195 manual for more information on this topic).
42196 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42197 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42201 \begin_inset space ~
42205 \begin_inset space ~
42210 generates the output of the whole book, while
42214 will just output the chapter alone.
42217 \begin_layout Standard
42218 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42219 in the document settings (menu
42221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42223 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42225 \begin_inset space ~
42229 \begin_inset space ~
42235 \begin_inset space ~
42239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42241 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42245 ) or in the preferences (menu
42247 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42248 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42253 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42255 \begin_inset space ~
42258 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42270 \begin_inset space ~
42274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42276 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42283 \begin_layout Subsection
42284 Update Master Document
42287 \begin_layout Standard
42288 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42304 \begin_inset space ~
42309 manual for more information on this topic).
42310 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42311 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42314 \begin_layout Standard
42315 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42316 in the document settings (menu
42318 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42319 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42320 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42322 \begin_inset space ~
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42332 \begin_inset space ~
42336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42338 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42342 ) or in the preferences (menu
42344 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42345 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42350 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42352 \begin_inset space ~
42355 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42357 \begin_inset space ~
42361 \begin_inset space ~
42367 \begin_inset space ~
42371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42373 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42380 \begin_layout Subsection
42382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42384 name "subsec:Compressed"
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42392 Un/compresses the current document.
42393 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42394 compression (see the
42396 Additional Features
42398 manual for details).
42401 \begin_layout Subsection
42405 \begin_layout Standard
42406 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42409 \begin_layout Subsection
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42414 The document settings are described in appendix
42415 \begin_inset space ~
42419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42421 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42428 \begin_layout Section
42430 \begin_inset Index idx
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42442 \begin_layout Subsection
42446 \begin_layout Standard
42447 Spell checking is explained in section
42448 \begin_inset space ~
42452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42454 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42461 \begin_layout Subsection
42465 \begin_layout Standard
42466 The thesaurus is described in section
42467 \begin_inset space ~
42471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42473 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42480 \begin_layout Subsection
42482 \begin_inset Index idx
42485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42492 \begin_inset Index idx
42495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42504 \begin_layout Standard
42505 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42506 the highlighted document part.
42509 \begin_layout Subsection
42515 \begin_inset Index idx
42518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42519 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42528 \begin_layout Standard
42529 Generates with the help of the program
42531 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42534 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42535 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42536 This feature is not available on Windows.
42539 \begin_layout Subsection
42545 \begin_inset Index idx
42548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42558 \begin_layout Standard
42559 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42564 \begin_inset space ~
42569 to see the full filename paths.
42572 \begin_layout Subsection
42574 \begin_inset Index idx
42577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42586 \begin_layout Standard
42587 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42588 files as described in section
42589 \begin_inset space ~
42593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42595 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42602 \begin_layout Subsection
42604 \begin_inset Index idx
42607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42638 \begin_inset Index idx
42641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42642 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42651 \begin_layout Standard
42652 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42653 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42654 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42655 -packages and programs it needs; see
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42663 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42670 \begin_layout Subsection
42674 \begin_layout Standard
42679 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42686 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42693 \begin_layout Section
42695 \begin_inset Index idx
42698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42707 \begin_layout Standard
42708 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42709 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42711 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42715 \begin_layout Standard
42719 \begin_inset space ~
42724 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42725 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42726 packages and classes found
42727 by \SpecialChar LyX
42729 \begin_inset space ~
42733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42735 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42742 \begin_layout Standard
42746 \begin_inset space ~
42751 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42756 \begin_layout Section
42758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42760 name "sec:Toolbars"
42767 \begin_layout Standard
42768 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42775 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42783 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42784 This is described in the
42786 Additional Features
42791 \begin_layout Subsection
42793 \begin_inset Index idx
42796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42805 \begin_layout Standard
42806 \begin_inset Graphics
42807 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42815 \begin_layout Standard
42816 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42823 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42840 \begin_inset Note Note
42843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42844 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42849 manual for more information.
42857 \begin_layout Standard
42858 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42864 \begin_layout Standard
42865 \begin_inset Tabular
42866 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42867 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42875 \begin_inset Graphics
42876 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42890 pull-down box for the environments
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42904 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42912 \begin_inset Tabular
42913 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42914 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42915 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42916 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42940 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42970 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43000 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43016 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43030 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43037 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43046 arg "spelling-continuously"
43054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43058 Spellcheck continuously
43064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43087 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43117 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43147 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43207 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43209 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43232 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43246 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43265 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43272 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43286 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43314 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43328 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43329 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43357 Emphasize text, function of the
43358 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43361 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43363 \begin_inset space ~
43366 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43368 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43374 arg "dialog-show character"
43385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 Set text to noun style, function of the
43407 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43410 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43412 \begin_inset space ~
43415 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43417 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43423 arg "dialog-show character"
43434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43440 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43443 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43456 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43472 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43477 arg "textstyle-apply"
43487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43492 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43493 Format text using the current settings in the
43495 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43500 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43535 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43537 \begin_inset space ~
43546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43555 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43583 arg "tabular-insert"
43591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43610 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43613 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43626 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43645 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43657 Toggle outline window on/off,
43659 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43675 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43687 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43702 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43714 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43727 \begin_layout Subsection
43729 \begin_inset Index idx
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43741 \begin_layout Standard
43742 \begin_inset Graphics
43743 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43751 \begin_layout Standard
43752 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43758 \begin_layout Standard
43759 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43763 \begin_layout Standard
43764 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43770 \begin_layout Standard
43771 \begin_inset Tabular
43772 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43773 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43774 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43775 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43812 arg "layout Enumerate"
43820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43839 arg "layout Itemize"
43847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43893 arg "layout Description"
43901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 arg "depth-increment"
43928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43934 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43940 \begin_inset space ~
43949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43958 arg "depth-decrement"
43966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43972 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43996 arg "float-insert figure"
44004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44011 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44027 arg "float-insert table"
44035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44042 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44088 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44109 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44118 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44132 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44182 arg "nomencl-insert"
44190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44216 arg "footnote-insert"
44224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44246 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44262 \begin_inset space ~
44271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44295 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44297 \begin_inset space ~
44306 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44315 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44329 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44400 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44424 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44440 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44455 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44475 arg "dialog-show character"
44483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44489 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44494 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44507 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44512 arg "textstyle-apply"
44520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44525 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44526 Format text using the recent settings in the
44529 arg "dialog-show character"
44538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44547 arg "layout-paragraph"
44555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44563 \begin_inset space ~
44572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44581 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44595 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44609 \begin_layout Subsection
44610 View/Update Toolbar
44611 \begin_inset Index idx
44614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44615 Toolbar ! View / Update
44623 \begin_layout Standard
44624 \begin_inset Graphics
44625 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44632 \begin_layout Standard
44633 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44639 \begin_layout Standard
44640 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44644 \begin_layout Standard
44645 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44651 \begin_layout Standard
44652 \begin_inset Tabular
44653 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44654 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44655 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44656 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44657 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44680 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44696 arg "buffer-update"
44704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44717 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44726 arg "master-buffer-view"
44734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44740 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44760 arg "master-buffer-update"
44768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44780 \begin_inset space ~
44789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44798 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44813 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44814 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44815 Synchronize with Output
44821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44832 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44849 View (Other Formats)
44855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44862 arg "update-others"
44866 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44881 Update (Other Formats)
44894 \begin_layout Standard
44896 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44897 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44903 \begin_layout Subsection
44907 \begin_layout Standard
44908 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44915 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44919 , the table toolbar
44920 \begin_inset Index idx
44923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44932 \begin_inset space ~
44937 manual and the math macro toolbar
44938 \begin_inset Index idx
44941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 \begin_layout Chapter
44955 The Document Settings
44956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44958 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44963 \begin_inset Index idx
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44967 Document ! Settings
44975 \begin_layout Standard
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44984 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44985 is called with the menu
44987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44991 You can save your document settings as default with the
44993 Save as Document Defaults
44995 button in any dialog.
44996 This will create a template named
45000 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45001 when you create a new document without
45005 \begin_layout Standard
45010 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45011 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45014 \begin_layout Standard
45015 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45016 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45017 to find the one you are looking for.
45018 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45019 the submenus of the dialog.
45021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45025 \begin_inset space \space{}
45029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45036 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45037 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45038 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45041 \begin_layout Section
45045 \begin_layout Standard
45046 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45048 Document classes are described in section
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45055 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45063 \begin_layout Standard
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45072 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45077 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45078 as a layout for a document class.
45079 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45081 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45090 \begin_layout Standard
45091 Some classes use special class options by default.
45092 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45096 and you can decide to use them or not.
45097 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45098 recommended you leave them untouched.
45103 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45104 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45109 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45111 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45117 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45118 \begin_inset Newline newline
45123 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45126 \begin_inset Newline newline
45129 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45130 distribution, see section
45135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45137 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45150 \begin_layout Standard
45155 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45156 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45157 in the background if the child document
45158 is opened without its master.
45159 This way child documents are always compilable.
45160 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45175 \begin_layout Standard
45176 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45187 \begin_inset Index idx
45190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45192 packages ! prettyref
45198 \begin_inset Index idx
45201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45203 packages ! refstyle
45208 for cross-references, see section
45209 \begin_inset space ~
45213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45215 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45222 \begin_layout Section
45226 \begin_layout Standard
45227 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45228 Please refer to the section
45231 \begin_inset space ~
45239 \begin_inset space ~
45244 manual for details.
45247 \begin_layout Section
45251 \begin_layout Standard
45252 Modules are explained in section
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45259 reference "subsec:Modules"
45266 \begin_layout Section
45270 \begin_layout Standard
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45278 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45285 \begin_layout Section
45289 \begin_layout Standard
45290 The document font settings are described in section
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45297 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45304 \begin_layout Section
45308 \begin_layout Standard
45309 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45321 \begin_inset space ~
45326 and whether it should be a
45329 \begin_inset space ~
45334 can also be specified here.
45337 \begin_layout Standard
45338 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45339 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45340 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45342 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45345 \begin_layout Standard
45348 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45351 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45352 justifies the text on screen.
45353 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45355 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45359 \begin_layout Standard
45361 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45370 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45375 \begin_layout Section
45379 \begin_layout Standard
45380 This dialog is described in sections
45381 \begin_inset space ~
45385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45387 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45394 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45401 \begin_layout Section
45405 \begin_layout Standard
45406 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45407 \begin_inset space ~
45411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45413 reference "subsec:Margins"
45420 \begin_layout Section
45422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45424 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45429 \begin_inset Index idx
45432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45433 Language ! Encoding
45441 \begin_layout Standard
45442 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45443 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45444 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45446 is always encoded in utf8).
45447 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45448 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45449 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45450 -command is not known for
45451 a particular character).
45452 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45456 \begin_layout Standard
45458 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45459 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45460 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45461 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45462 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45463 's default encoding).
45464 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45465 's Unicode support covers the
45466 characters of most scripts.
45467 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45468 using one of the traditional, or
45469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45476 , encodings is necessary.
45479 \begin_layout Standard
45481 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45483 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45486 Traditional (auto-selected)
45492 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45493 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45494 the given language(s).
45496 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45500 \begin_layout Standard
45502 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45503 If you use the option
45508 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45511 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45512 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45515 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45518 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45519 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45520 exactly one encoding.
45521 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45526 \begin_layout Standard
45528 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45529 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45535 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45536 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45540 \begin_layout Standard
45542 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45543 Finally, you can also select
45547 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45548 Note that this encoding is then used for
45553 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45554 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45558 \begin_layout Standard
45560 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45563 Do not load inputenc
45565 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45566 from automatically loading the
45573 \begin_inset Index idx
45576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45578 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45580 packages ! inputenc
45586 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45587 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45588 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45589 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45590 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45592 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45598 Traditional (auto-selected)
45605 \begin_layout Standard
45607 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45609 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45610 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45611 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45612 installation supports Unicode), choose
45613 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45614 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45615 is quite incomplete, so
45616 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45621 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45622 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45623 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45624 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45625 -commands is not used, because all
45626 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45627 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45628 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45629 , two new alternative engines
45630 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45632 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45634 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45637 \begin_inset space ~
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45659 \begin_inset space ~
45663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45665 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45670 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45674 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45679 \begin_layout Standard
45683 \begin_inset space ~
45688 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45689 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45699 The possible settings are:
45702 \begin_layout Description
45703 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45705 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45706 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45710 \begin_inset space ~
45714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45716 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45723 \begin_layout Description
45724 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45725 format you will use.
45726 In many cases this will be
45731 \begin_inset Index idx
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45742 If the newer package
45747 \begin_inset Index idx
45750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 packages ! polyglossia
45757 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45758 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45759 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45761 this package will be used instead of
45768 \begin_layout Description
45770 \begin_inset space ~
45781 would be more appropriate.
45784 \begin_layout Description
45785 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45786 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45790 (for German texts), type in
45793 \begin_inset Newline newline
45798 usepackage{ngerman}
45801 \begin_layout Description
45802 None will not use a language package.
45803 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45806 \begin_layout Standard
45807 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45810 \begin_layout Description
45812 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45814 \begin_inset space ~
45818 \begin_inset space ~
45822 \begin_inset space ~
45829 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45835 \begin_inset Index idx
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45840 packages ! inputenc
45846 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45847 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45848 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45854 \begin_layout Description
45855 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45857 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45858 commands, which may result in a big
45859 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45860 -commands are needed.
45862 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45863 This is the same as the
45876 \begin_layout Description
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45882 \begin_inset space ~
45885 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45888 \begin_layout Description
45890 \begin_inset space ~
45894 \begin_inset space ~
45897 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45900 \begin_layout Description
45902 \begin_inset space ~
45905 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45908 \begin_layout Description
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45914 \begin_inset space ~
45917 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45918 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45921 \begin_layout Description
45923 \begin_inset space ~
45927 \begin_inset space ~
45930 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45934 \begin_layout Description
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45940 \begin_inset space ~
45943 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45944 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45947 \begin_layout Description
45949 \begin_inset space ~
45953 \begin_inset space ~
45957 \begin_inset space ~
45960 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45967 \begin_layout Description
45969 \begin_inset space ~
45973 \begin_inset space ~
45977 \begin_inset space ~
45980 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45981 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45984 \begin_layout Description
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45993 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45994 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45995 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45996 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45997 \begin_inset space ~
46001 \begin_inset space ~
46007 \begin_layout Description
46009 \begin_inset space ~
46013 \begin_inset space ~
46016 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46017 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46018 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46020 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46021 \begin_inset space ~
46025 \begin_inset space ~
46031 \begin_layout Description
46033 \begin_inset space ~
46037 \begin_inset space ~
46040 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46043 \begin_layout Description
46045 \begin_inset space ~
46049 \begin_inset space ~
46052 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46055 \begin_layout Description
46057 \begin_inset space ~
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46064 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46067 \begin_layout Description
46069 \begin_inset space ~
46072 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46075 \begin_layout Description
46077 \begin_inset space ~
46080 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46083 \begin_layout Description
46085 \begin_inset space ~
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46092 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46095 \begin_layout Description
46097 \begin_inset space ~
46101 \begin_inset space ~
46107 \begin_layout Description
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46113 \begin_inset space ~
46116 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46119 \begin_layout Description
46121 \begin_inset space ~
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46131 \begin_layout Description
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46140 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46146 \begin_inset Index idx
46149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46156 , when using this, set the document language to
46161 \begin_layout Description
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46167 \begin_inset space ~
46170 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46175 , when using this, set the document language to
46178 \begin_inset space ~
46184 \begin_layout Description
46186 \begin_inset space ~
46190 \begin_inset space ~
46193 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46199 \begin_inset Index idx
46202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46204 packages ! japanese
46209 , when using this, set the document language to
46214 \begin_layout Description
46216 \begin_inset space ~
46220 \begin_inset space ~
46223 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46228 , when using this, set the document language to
46233 \begin_layout Description
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46239 \begin_inset space ~
46242 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46247 , when using this, set the document language to
46252 \begin_layout Description
46254 \begin_inset space ~
46257 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46260 \begin_layout Description
46262 \begin_inset space ~
46266 \begin_inset space ~
46270 \begin_inset space ~
46273 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46276 \begin_layout Description
46278 \begin_inset space ~
46282 \begin_inset space ~
46286 \begin_inset space ~
46289 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46290 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46291 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46294 \begin_layout Description
46296 \begin_inset space ~
46300 \begin_inset space ~
46306 \begin_layout Description
46308 \begin_inset space ~
46312 \begin_inset space ~
46315 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46316 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46319 \begin_layout Description
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46325 \begin_inset space ~
46328 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46334 \begin_inset Index idx
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46344 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46345 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46347 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46348 with the default encoding (
46350 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46356 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46357 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46362 \begin_layout Description
46364 \begin_inset space ~
46372 \begin_inset space ~
46375 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46382 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46385 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46392 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46393 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46395 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46398 \begin_layout Description
46400 \begin_inset space ~
46404 \begin_inset space ~
46407 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46413 \begin_inset Index idx
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46424 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46427 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46429 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46430 This used to be more comprehensive than
46433 \begin_inset space ~
46438 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46443 \begin_layout Description
46445 \begin_inset space ~
46448 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46454 \begin_inset Index idx
46457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46459 packages ! inputenc
46466 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46467 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46469 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46470 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46471 with the default encoding (
46473 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46479 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46480 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46485 \begin_layout Description
46487 \begin_inset space ~
46491 \begin_inset space ~
46495 \begin_inset space ~
46498 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46499 \begin_inset space ~
46505 \begin_layout Description
46507 \begin_inset space ~
46511 \begin_inset space ~
46515 \begin_inset space ~
46518 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46519 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46520 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46524 \begin_layout Description
46526 \begin_inset space ~
46530 \begin_inset space ~
46534 \begin_inset space ~
46537 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46538 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46541 \begin_layout Section
46543 \begin_inset Index idx
46546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 \begin_inset Index idx
46556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46563 \begin_inset Index idx
46566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46567 Color ! Shaded boxes
46573 \begin_inset Index idx
46576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46577 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46585 \begin_layout Standard
46586 Here you can alter the font color for the
46590 (default: black), for
46593 \begin_inset space ~
46598 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46602 (default: white) and for
46605 \begin_inset space ~
46615 sets the color back to the default.
46618 \begin_layout Standard
46619 Clicking any button showing
46627 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46628 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46629 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46630 later more quickly.
46633 \begin_layout Standard
46634 Note, if you change the
46637 \begin_inset space ~
46642 font color and use the option
46645 \begin_inset space ~
46650 in the document settings under
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46658 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46659 \begin_inset space ~
46663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46665 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46672 \begin_layout Standard
46673 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46679 \begin_layout Standard
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46692 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46695 \begin_inset space ~
46698 Code after a forced page break:
46701 \begin_layout Itemize
46702 For the page color:
46703 \begin_inset Newline newline
46710 pagecolor{color name}
46713 \begin_layout Itemize
46714 For the text color:
46715 \begin_inset Newline newline
46725 \begin_layout Standard
46726 You are restricted to one of
46762 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46769 \begin_inset space ~
46775 \begin_inset Newline newline
46778 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46779 names to refer to them:
46782 \begin_layout Itemize
46788 \begin_inset Newline newline
46793 page_backgroundcolor
46796 \begin_layout Itemize
46800 \begin_inset space ~
46806 \begin_inset Newline newline
46814 \begin_layout Itemize
46818 \begin_inset space ~
46824 \begin_inset Newline newline
46832 \begin_layout Itemize
46836 \begin_inset space ~
46842 \begin_inset Newline newline
46850 \begin_layout Standard
46851 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46862 \begin_inset space ~
46870 \begin_layout Section
46872 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
46876 \begin_layout Standard
46878 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
46879 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
46880 \begin_inset space ~
46884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46886 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46894 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
46895 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
46898 \begin_layout Standard
46900 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
46901 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
46903 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
46906 \begin_layout Section
46910 \begin_layout Standard
46911 Here you can adjust the
46915 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46919 as described in section
46920 \begin_inset space ~
46924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46926 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46931 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46935 \begin_layout Standard
46937 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46938 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46940 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46941 of this package can be used as well.
46942 The most common one are:
46945 \begin_layout Description
46947 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46948 right Line numbers to the right margin
46951 \begin_layout Description
46953 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46954 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46958 \begin_layout Description
46960 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46961 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46964 \begin_layout Description
46966 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46967 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46970 \begin_layout Description
46972 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46974 \begin_inset space ~
46977 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46982 \begin_layout Section
46986 \begin_layout Standard
46987 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46993 \begin_inset Index idx
46996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46998 packages ! biblatex
47008 \begin_inset Index idx
47011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47023 \begin_inset Index idx
47026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47034 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47037 Sectioned bibliography
47039 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47045 \begin_inset Index idx
47048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47050 packages ! bibtopic
47060 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47061 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47065 for the generation of the bibliography.
47066 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47067 \begin_inset space ~
47071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47073 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47080 \begin_layout Section
47084 \begin_layout Standard
47085 Here you can define the
47089 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47091 \begin_inset space ~
47095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47097 reference "sec:Index"
47104 \begin_layout Section
47108 \begin_layout Standard
47109 The PDF properties are explained in section
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47116 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47123 \begin_layout Section
47127 \begin_layout Standard
47128 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47129 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47135 \begin_inset Index idx
47138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47150 \begin_inset Index idx
47153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47165 \begin_inset Index idx
47168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47180 \begin_inset Index idx
47183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 \begin_inset Index idx
47198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47200 packages ! mathdots
47210 \begin_inset Index idx
47213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47215 packages ! mathtools
47225 \begin_inset Index idx
47228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47240 \begin_inset Index idx
47243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47245 packages ! stackrel
47255 \begin_inset Index idx
47258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47260 packages ! stmaryrd
47270 \begin_inset Index idx
47273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47275 packages ! undertilde
47280 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47283 \begin_layout Description
47284 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47285 -errors in formulas,
47286 ensure that you have this enabled.
47289 \begin_layout Description
47290 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47291 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47292 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47296 \begin_layout Description
47297 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47300 \begin_inset space ~
47312 \begin_layout Description
47313 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47316 \begin_inset space ~
47328 \begin_layout Description
47329 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47340 \begin_layout Description
47341 mathtools is used for the math commands
47377 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47384 \begin_layout Description
47385 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47387 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47396 \begin_layout Description
47397 stackrel is used for the math command
47414 \begin_layout Description
47415 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47418 \begin_layout Description
47419 undertilde is used for the math command
47427 Accents for one Character
47436 \begin_layout Section
47438 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47440 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47446 \begin_layout Standard
47448 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47449 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47452 \begin_layout Standard
47454 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47455 The float placement options
47456 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47459 are described in the section
47462 \begin_inset space ~
47466 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47468 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_layout Section
47488 \begin_layout Standard
47489 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47491 Program Code Listings
47496 \begin_inset space ~
47504 \begin_layout Section
47508 \begin_layout Standard
47509 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47517 set to be used and set the
47522 The itemize environment is described in section
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47529 reference "sec:Itemize"
47536 \begin_layout Standard
47537 You can furthermore specify a
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47545 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47546 command of the desired character.
47547 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47554 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47560 \begin_inset space \space{}
47564 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47574 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47575 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47578 \begin_layout Standard
47579 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47587 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47588 -packages in the preamble (menu
47591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47601 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47605 usepackage{textcomp}
47608 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47612 usepackage{amssymb}
47622 \begin_layout Section
47626 \begin_layout Standard
47627 Branches are described in section
47628 \begin_inset space ~
47632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47634 reference "sec:Branches"
47641 \begin_layout Section
47643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47645 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47652 \begin_layout Standard
47653 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47656 \begin_layout Description
47658 \begin_inset space ~
47662 \begin_inset space ~
47665 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47685 View Master Document
47686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47693 Update Master Document
47694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47701 menu or the toolbar.
47702 The default is set in
47704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47705 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47710 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47714 \begin_inset space ~
47718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47720 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47727 \begin_layout Description
47729 \begin_inset space ~
47733 \begin_inset space ~
47736 Output settings for the menu
47738 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47746 For a detailed description see section
47748 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47761 \begin_layout Description
47763 \begin_inset space ~
47767 \begin_inset space ~
47770 Options offers settings for the export format
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47783 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47784 \begin_inset space ~
47787 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47791 \begin_inset space ~
47796 settings are described in detail in section
47798 Math Output in XHTML
47803 \begin_inset space ~
47812 \begin_inset space ~
47816 \begin_inset space ~
47821 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47824 \begin_layout Description
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47831 Save transient properties
47833 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47834 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47835 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47839 \begin_layout Itemize
47840 the activation of change tracking
47843 \begin_layout Itemize
47844 the output of tracked changes
47847 \begin_layout Itemize
47848 the recording of the document directory path.
47851 \begin_layout Standard
47852 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47853 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47857 \begin_layout Section
47865 \begin_layout Standard
47866 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47868 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47870 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47872 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47876 \begin_layout Standard
47877 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47878 -syntax is given in section
47879 \begin_inset space ~
47883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47885 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47892 \begin_layout Chapter
47898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47900 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47905 \begin_inset Index idx
47908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47917 \begin_layout Standard
47918 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47920 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47924 It has the following submenus.
47927 \begin_layout Section
47931 \begin_layout Subsection
47935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47936 User Interface File
47937 \begin_inset Index idx
47940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47941 Customization ! of toolbars
47947 \begin_inset Index idx
47950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47951 Customization ! of menus
47959 \begin_layout Standard
47960 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47961 interface (ui) file.
47962 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47970 \begin_layout Description
47975 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47978 \begin_layout Description
47985 the menu entries in popup context menus
47988 \begin_layout Description
47993 specifies the toolbar buttons
47996 \begin_layout Standard
47997 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47998 and edit the entries.
48001 \begin_layout Standard
48002 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48014 entries must be finished with an explicit
48039 and in the case of the
48040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48052 The syntax for the entries is:
48055 \begin_layout Standard
48056 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48085 \begin_layout Standard
48087 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48090 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48091 -functions are listed in the menu
48093 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48095 \begin_inset space ~
48103 \begin_layout Standard
48104 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48110 \begin_layout Standard
48111 For example, assuming you use the menu
48113 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48116 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48120 \begin_layout Standard
48121 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48145 \begin_layout Standard
48147 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48162 to have the sixth bookmark.
48165 \begin_layout Standard
48169 \begin_inset space ~
48174 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48175 's toolbar buttons.
48176 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48180 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48192 \begin_layout Standard
48195 Enable tool tips in main work area
48197 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48205 \begin_layout Standard
48210 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48211 should display in the menu
48213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48215 \begin_inset space ~
48223 \begin_layout Subsection
48227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48231 \begin_layout Standard
48234 Restore window layouts and geometries
48237 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48238 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48242 \begin_layout Standard
48245 Restore cursor positions
48247 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48251 \begin_layout Standard
48254 Load opened files from last session
48256 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48260 \begin_layout Standard
48263 Clear all session information
48265 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48266 sessions (cursor positions, names
48267 of last opened documents, etc.).
48270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48274 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48279 \begin_inset Index idx
48282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48291 \begin_layout Standard
48294 Backup original documents when saving
48296 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48297 it was saved the last time.
48298 It is stored in the
48301 \begin_inset space ~
48307 \begin_inset space ~
48311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48313 reference "sec:Paths"
48317 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48326 The backup file has the file extension
48327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48341 \begin_layout Standard
48344 Backup documents, every
48346 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48349 \begin_layout Standard
48352 Save documents compressed by default
48354 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48355 \begin_inset space ~
48359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48361 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48366 This applies to newly created documents only.
48367 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48371 Windows & work area
48374 \begin_layout Standard
48377 Open documents in tabs
48379 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48383 \begin_layout Standard
48388 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48395 \begin_inset space ~
48399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48401 reference "sec:Paths"
48405 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48412 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48413 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48414 of \SpecialChar LyX
48416 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48417 instance is created for each file.
48420 \begin_layout Standard
48423 Single close-tab button
48425 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48435 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48436 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48437 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48441 \begin_layout Standard
48442 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48450 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48451 before the change takes effect.
48459 \begin_layout Standard
48464 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48466 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48468 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48472 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48473 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48474 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48477 \begin_layout Subsection
48479 \begin_inset Index idx
48482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48491 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48498 \begin_layout Standard
48499 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48503 \begin_layout Standard
48504 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48512 This section only deals with the fonts
48516 the \SpecialChar LyX
48518 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48522 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48533 \begin_layout Standard
48534 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48551 (depends on the system) as its
48554 \begin_inset space ~
48570 \begin_layout Standard
48571 You can change the font size with the
48578 \begin_layout Standard
48583 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48588 points have the size of 1
48589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48593 \begin_inset space ~
48597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48599 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48604 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48609 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48610 \begin_inset space ~
48614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48616 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48623 \begin_layout Subsection
48625 \begin_inset Index idx
48628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48629 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48636 \begin_inset Index idx
48639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48648 \begin_layout Standard
48649 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48650 by choosing an item in the
48651 list and selecting the
48658 \begin_layout Standard
48659 By checking the option
48663 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48666 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48667 \begin_inset space ~
48671 \begin_inset space ~
48676 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48679 \begin_layout Subsection
48681 \begin_inset Index idx
48684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48693 \begin_layout Standard
48694 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48698 \begin_layout Standard
48703 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48704 This feature is described in section
48705 \begin_inset space ~
48709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48711 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48718 \begin_layout Standard
48719 Checking the option
48722 \begin_inset space ~
48726 \begin_inset space ~
48730 \begin_inset space ~
48735 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48738 \begin_layout Section
48740 \begin_inset Index idx
48743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 \begin_layout Subsection
48756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48760 \begin_layout Standard
48763 Cursor follows scrollbar
48765 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48769 \begin_layout Standard
48770 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48771 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48772 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48775 \begin_layout Standard
48778 Scroll below end of document
48780 is self-explanatory.
48783 \begin_layout Standard
48784 In \SpecialChar LyX
48785 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48792 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48794 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48795 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48798 \begin_layout Standard
48801 Sort environments alphabetically
48803 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48806 \begin_layout Standard
48809 Group environments by their category
48811 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48814 \begin_layout Standard
48819 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48834 \begin_layout Standard
48835 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48840 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48841 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48845 \begin_layout Subsection
48847 \begin_inset Index idx
48850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48857 \begin_inset Index idx
48860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48861 Settings ! Shortcuts
48869 \begin_layout Standard
48874 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48876 Several binding files are available, among them:
48879 \begin_layout Description
48880 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48883 \begin_layout Description
48884 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48896 \begin_layout Description
48897 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48908 \begin_layout Standard
48909 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48914 , and binding files for special languages.
48915 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48920 \begin_inset space \space{}
48924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48932 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48933 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48934 will try to use the appropriate binding
48938 \begin_layout Standard
48939 Some binding files, like
48943 , only have a limited scope.
48944 When looking at the end of the file
48948 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48951 \begin_layout Standard
48955 \begin_inset space ~
48959 \begin_inset space ~
48964 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48965 in the selected key binding file.
48968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48972 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48977 \begin_inset Index idx
48980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 Key Bindings ! Editing
48989 \begin_layout Standard
48990 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48991 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48992 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48993 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48996 Show key-bindings containing
48999 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49000 Insert there for example as keyword
49001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49008 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49009 functions that contain
49010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49018 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49019 All \SpecialChar LyX
49020 functions are also listed in the file
49025 that you will find in the
49032 \begin_layout Standard
49033 For example, to add the shortcut
49041 , select the function and press the
49046 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49047 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49050 \begin_layout Standard
49051 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49052 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49054 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49055 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49057 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49062 \begin_layout Standard
49063 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49066 \begin_layout Standard
49067 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49069 The syntax of the entries is:
49072 \begin_layout Standard
49078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49097 \begin_layout Standard
49098 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49099 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49127 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49128 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49129 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49130 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49132 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49136 , you needed to specify it as
49141 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49144 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49147 \begin_layout Subsection
49149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49151 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49156 \begin_inset Index idx
49159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49166 \begin_inset Index idx
49169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49170 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49178 \begin_layout Standard
49179 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49180 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49181 provides keyboard maps.
49182 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49183 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49186 \begin_inset space ~
49190 \begin_inset space ~
49195 and select the keyboard map file named
49202 \begin_layout Standard
49211 keyboard map and, if you use the
49215 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49218 arg "keymap-primary"
49224 arg "keymap-secondary"
49227 respectively or toggle between them with
49230 arg "keymap-toggle"
49236 \begin_layout Standard
49237 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49245 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49254 \begin_layout Standard
49255 You can also specify the mouse
49257 Wheel scrolling speed
49260 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49264 Middle mouse button pasting
49266 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49267 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49270 \begin_layout Standard
49278 \begin_inset space ~
49282 \begin_inset space ~
49287 you can select a key for zooming.
49288 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49291 \begin_layout Subsection
49295 \begin_layout Standard
49296 Input completion is described in section
49297 \begin_inset space ~
49301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49303 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49310 \begin_layout Section
49312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49319 \begin_inset Index idx
49322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49329 \begin_inset Index idx
49332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49341 \begin_layout Standard
49342 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49343 are normally determined during
49345 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49348 \begin_layout Description
49350 \begin_inset space ~
49353 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49354 's working directory.
49355 It is the default when you
49366 \begin_inset space ~
49374 \begin_layout Description
49376 \begin_inset space ~
49379 templates This directory
49380 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49381 contains the templates that are shown
49382 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49383 will be opened when you use the menu
49384 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49389 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49391 \begin_inset space ~
49395 \begin_inset space ~
49403 \begin_layout Description
49405 \begin_inset space ~
49408 files This directory
49409 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49410 will be opened when you use the
49411 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49412 contains the example files that are listed in
49415 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49424 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49426 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49428 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49434 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49436 \begin_inset Newline newline
49440 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49452 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49453 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49463 \begin_layout Description
49465 \begin_inset space ~
49469 \begin_inset Index idx
49472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49478 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49479 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49480 \begin_inset space ~
49484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49486 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49494 will be used to save the backups.
49495 \begin_inset Newline newline
49498 Backup files have the ending
49499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49509 \begin_layout Description
49511 \begin_inset space ~
49514 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49515 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49517 \begin_inset Newline newline
49524 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49530 You can edit this file with the program
49539 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49540 in its preferences under
49543 \begin_inset space ~
49549 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49554 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49556 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49557 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49563 and \SpecialChar LyX
49564 need to be running the same time.
49565 \begin_inset Newline newline
49568 The pipe is also used for the
49572 feature, see section
49573 \begin_inset space ~
49577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49579 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49584 \begin_inset Newline newline
49587 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49588 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49589 \begin_inset Newline newline
49605 \begin_layout Description
49607 \begin_inset space ~
49610 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49613 \begin_layout Description
49615 \begin_inset space ~
49618 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49619 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49620 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49623 \begin_layout Description
49625 \begin_inset space ~
49628 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49634 You only need to specify it if you are using
49638 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49640 For \SpecialChar LyX
49645 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49649 \begin_layout Description
49651 \begin_inset space ~
49654 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49655 When \SpecialChar LyX
49656 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49657 to find it on the system.
49658 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49660 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49669 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49670 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49673 \begin_layout Description
49675 \begin_inset space ~
49678 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49679 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49680 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49681 code or in the document
49683 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49685 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49686 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49687 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49688 scanned for the input files.
49689 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49690 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49692 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49693 compilation may fail for some documents.
49696 \begin_layout Section
49700 \begin_layout Standard
49701 Here you can insert your
49710 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49712 \begin_inset space ~
49716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49718 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49722 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49725 \begin_layout Section
49727 \begin_inset Index idx
49730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49731 Language ! Settings
49737 \begin_inset Index idx
49740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49741 Settings ! Language
49749 \begin_layout Subsection
49751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49753 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49760 \begin_layout Description
49762 \begin_inset space ~
49766 \begin_inset space ~
49769 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49771 You can find its actual translation status here:
49772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49774 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49780 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
49784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49786 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
49787 LaTeX Language Support
49792 \begin_layout Description
49794 \begin_inset space ~
49797 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49798 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49799 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49800 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49817 The most widespread language package is
49822 \begin_inset Index idx
49825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49832 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49834 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49835 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49836 come with the alternative
49842 \begin_inset Index idx
49845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49847 packages ! polyglossia
49852 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49853 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49859 The available selections are described in section
49860 \begin_inset space ~
49864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49866 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49873 \begin_layout Description
49875 \begin_inset space ~
49879 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
49880 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49881 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49883 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
49887 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
49891 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
49893 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
49897 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
49898 that is used to switch to a different language
49899 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
49900 to start the package
49904 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
49905 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
49909 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
49910 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
49913 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49925 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
49933 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
49936 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49938 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49942 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49960 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49961 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
49968 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
49969 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49974 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
49979 , this setting is ignored.
49984 \begin_layout Description
49986 \begin_inset space ~
49990 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
49997 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
49998 Use this if the language switch set in
50002 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50006 's alternative command
50010 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50011 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50014 end{otherlanguage*}
50018 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50019 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50020 command toggles the package on and off
50021 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50022 Empty by default, as
50026 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50028 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50033 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50039 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50044 , this setting is ignored.
50049 \begin_layout Description
50051 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50053 \begin_inset space ~
50057 \begin_inset space ~
50060 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50064 \begin_layout Description
50066 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50068 \begin_inset space ~
50072 \begin_inset space ~
50075 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50081 \begin_layout Description
50083 \begin_inset space ~
50087 \begin_inset space ~
50091 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50093 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50096 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50097 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50100 to the document class options
50101 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50102 rather than the language package options.
50103 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50107 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50108 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50110 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50111 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50113 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50118 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50119 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50128 \begin_layout Description
50130 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50136 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50138 \begin_inset space ~
50142 \begin_inset space ~
50146 \begin_inset space ~
50152 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50154 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50157 this option is set,
50158 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50159 the language switch defined in
50162 \begin_inset space ~
50167 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50168 to the document language.
50169 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50170 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50173 \begin_inset space ~
50178 or if a package resets the document language.
50179 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50180 usually should be the document language).
50181 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50182 documents start with the chosen document language.
50183 When this option is not set, the
50186 \begin_inset space ~
50191 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50193 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50196 \begin_inset space ~
50206 \begin_layout Description
50208 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50210 \begin_inset space ~
50214 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50216 \begin_inset space ~
50220 \begin_inset space ~
50224 \begin_inset space ~
50230 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50234 \begin_inset space ~
50238 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50239 Set document language explicitly
50245 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50247 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50253 \begin_inset space ~
50259 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50261 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50265 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50267 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50270 the end of the document.
50271 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50276 \paragraph_spacing single
50278 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50284 \begin_layout Description
50286 \begin_inset space ~
50290 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50292 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50296 \begin_inset space ~
50300 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50302 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50304 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50308 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50311 in a language different
50312 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50314 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50317 the document language will be
50318 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50319 marked (by default with a blue
50322 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50324 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50328 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50332 \begin_layout Description
50334 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50336 \begin_inset space ~
50340 \begin_inset space ~
50344 \begin_inset space ~
50347 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50348 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50349 switched via the operating system.
50350 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50355 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50356 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50361 \begin_layout Description
50363 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50365 \begin_inset space ~
50369 \begin_inset space ~
50372 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50373 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50378 \begin_layout Description
50380 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50382 \begin_inset space ~
50386 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50388 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50392 \begin_inset space ~
50396 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50397 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50398 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50400 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50404 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50406 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50407 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50409 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50410 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50411 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50413 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50418 \begin_layout Standard
50423 means that the cursor
50424 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50425 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50426 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50431 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50432 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50436 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50438 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50439 specific case always means: move
50443 in text (even if this means:
50449 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50450 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50451 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50452 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50453 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50465 \begin_layout Standard
50467 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50472 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50473 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50474 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50478 ) when coming from the left.
50479 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50481 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50482 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50483 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50490 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50494 \begin_layout Description
50496 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50498 \begin_inset space ~
50502 \begin_inset space ~
50505 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50506 separator alignment).
50507 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50512 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50513 (static) custom character here.
50516 \begin_layout Description
50518 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50520 \begin_inset space ~
50524 \begin_inset space ~
50527 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50533 \begin_layout Subsection
50537 \begin_layout Standard
50538 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50539 \begin_inset space ~
50543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50545 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50552 \begin_layout Section
50556 \begin_layout Subsection
50558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50560 name "subsec:General-output"
50567 \begin_layout Description
50569 \begin_inset space ~
50572 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50574 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50576 \begin_inset space ~
50582 For a detailed description see section
50584 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50589 \begin_inset space ~
50597 \begin_layout Description
50599 \begin_inset space ~
50602 Options Options for the program
50606 that is used for the export format
50611 \begin_inset space ~
50615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50617 reference "subsec:Export"
50622 Possible options are listed in the
50627 \begin_inset Newline newline
50631 \begin_inset Flex URL
50634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50636 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50646 \begin_layout Description
50648 \begin_inset space ~
50652 \begin_inset space ~
50655 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50658 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50659 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50661 \begin_inset space ~
50667 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50670 \begin_layout Description
50672 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50674 \begin_inset space ~
50678 \begin_inset Index idx
50681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50688 \begin_inset Index idx
50691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50692 Settings ! Date format
50697 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50698 \begin_inset Newline newline
50702 \begin_inset Flex URL
50705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50707 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50713 \begin_inset Newline newline
50716 For example the format
50717 \begin_inset Newline newline
50721 \begin_inset Newline newline
50724 prints the date as day/month/year.
50729 \begin_layout Description
50731 \begin_inset space ~
50735 \begin_inset space ~
50738 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50739 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50742 \begin_layout Subsection
50748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50750 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50755 \begin_inset Index idx
50758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50759 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50768 \begin_layout Description
50770 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50772 \begin_inset space ~
50780 \begin_inset space ~
50784 \begin_inset space ~
50787 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50792 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50813 are used for Cyrillic.
50814 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50827 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50829 sets up in the background.
50830 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50835 \begin_layout Description
50837 \begin_inset space ~
50841 \begin_inset space ~
50845 \begin_inset space ~
50849 \begin_inset space ~
50852 options They only have an effect when the program
50856 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50859 \begin_layout Standard
50860 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50861 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50862 manuals of the applications.
50865 \begin_layout Description
50867 \begin_inset space ~
50870 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
50871 \begin_inset space ~
50875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50877 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50884 \begin_layout Description
50886 \begin_inset space ~
50889 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
50890 \begin_inset space ~
50894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50896 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50903 \begin_layout Description
50905 \begin_inset space ~
50908 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
50909 \begin_inset space ~
50913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50915 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50922 \begin_layout Description
50928 \begin_inset space ~
50931 command Command for the program
50933 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50936 that is described in the section
50938 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50943 Additional Features
50948 \begin_layout Standard
50949 There are additionally the following options:
50952 \begin_layout Description
50954 \begin_inset space ~
50958 \begin_inset space ~
50962 \begin_inset space ~
50966 \begin_inset space ~
50971 \begin_inset space ~
50974 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50992 to separate folders.
50993 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50995 \begin_inset Index idx
50998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51005 \begin_inset Index idx
51008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51017 \begin_layout Description
51019 \begin_inset space ~
51023 \begin_inset space ~
51027 \begin_inset space ~
51031 \begin_inset space ~
51035 \begin_inset space ~
51039 \begin_inset space ~
51042 changes Removes all manually set
51048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51051 \begin_inset space ~
51056 dialog when changing the document class.
51059 \begin_layout Section
51061 \begin_inset space ~
51065 \begin_inset Index idx
51068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51077 \begin_layout Subsection
51079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51081 name "subsec:Converters"
51086 \begin_inset Index idx
51089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51098 \begin_layout Standard
51099 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51100 from one format to another.
51101 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51102 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51109 \begin_inset space ~
51114 field and press the
51119 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51123 \begin_inset space ~
51128 drop-down list, modify the
51132 field and press the
51139 \begin_layout Standard
51142 Converter File Cache
51148 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51150 Maximum Age (in days
51153 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51154 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51157 \begin_layout Standard
51158 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51159 definition, is described in the section
51170 \begin_layout Subsection
51172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51174 name "sec:File-Formats"
51179 \begin_inset Index idx
51182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51189 \begin_inset Index idx
51192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51201 \begin_layout Standard
51202 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51212 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51215 \begin_layout Standard
51216 You can also define the
51218 Default output format
51220 that is used when you use
51222 View, Update, View Master Document
51226 Update Master Document
51232 menu or the toolbar.
51235 \begin_layout Standard
51236 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51247 \begin_layout Standard
51248 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51250 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51251 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51252 This is done by specifying a
51257 More about this is described in the section
51268 \begin_layout Chapter
51269 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51271 \begin_inset Index idx
51274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51283 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51290 \begin_layout Standard
51292 \begin_inset space ~
51296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51298 reference "tab:Units"
51302 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51303 and used in this documentation.
51306 \begin_layout Standard
51307 \begin_inset Float table
51314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51315 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51333 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51341 \begin_inset Tabular
51342 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51343 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51344 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51345 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51499 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51770 scaled point (65536
51771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51838 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51962 % of original image width
51967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52051 \begin_layout Standard
52052 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52055 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52062 \begin_layout Bibliography
52063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52064 LatexCommand bibitem
52071 The \SpecialChar LyX
52073 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52076 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52082 \begin_inset Newline newline
52086 \begin_inset Flex URL
52089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52091 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52099 \begin_layout Bibliography
52100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52101 LatexCommand bibitem
52102 key "latexcompanion"
52107 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52109 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52110 Companion Second Edition.
52113 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52116 \begin_layout Bibliography
52117 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52118 LatexCommand bibitem
52124 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52127 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52131 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52134 \begin_layout Bibliography
52135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52136 LatexCommand bibitem
52145 : A Document Preparation System.
52148 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52151 \begin_layout Bibliography
52152 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52153 LatexCommand bibitem
52163 The \SpecialChar TeX
52167 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52170 \begin_layout Bibliography
52171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52172 LatexCommand bibitem
52178 The \SpecialChar TeX
52180 \begin_inset Newline newline
52184 \begin_inset Flex URL
52187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52189 https://ctan.org/topic
52197 \begin_layout Bibliography
52198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52199 LatexCommand bibitem
52205 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52207 \begin_inset Newline newline
52211 \begin_inset Flex URL
52214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52216 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52224 \begin_layout Bibliography
52225 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52226 LatexCommand bibitem
52233 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52235 name "Documentation"
52236 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52243 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52247 \begin_inset Newline newline
52251 \begin_inset Flex URL
52254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52256 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52264 \begin_layout Bibliography
52265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52266 LatexCommand bibitem
52273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52275 name "Documentation"
52276 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52281 how to use the program
52283 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52287 \begin_inset Newline newline
52291 \begin_inset Flex URL
52294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52296 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52304 \begin_layout Bibliography
52305 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52306 LatexCommand bibitem
52313 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52315 name "Documentation"
52316 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52321 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52327 \begin_inset Index idx
52330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52332 packages ! biblatex
52338 \begin_inset Newline newline
52342 \begin_inset Flex URL
52345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52347 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52355 \begin_layout Bibliography
52356 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52357 LatexCommand bibitem
52364 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52366 name "Documentation"
52367 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52372 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52378 \begin_inset Index idx
52381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52389 \begin_inset Newline newline
52393 \begin_inset Flex URL
52396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52398 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52406 \begin_layout Bibliography
52407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52408 LatexCommand bibitem
52415 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52417 name "Documentation"
52418 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52428 \begin_inset Newline newline
52432 \begin_inset Flex URL
52435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52437 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52445 \begin_layout Bibliography
52446 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52447 LatexCommand bibitem
52448 key "makeindex-man"
52454 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52457 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52467 \begin_inset Newline newline
52471 \begin_inset Flex URL
52474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52476 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52484 \begin_layout Bibliography
52485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52486 LatexCommand bibitem
52493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52495 name "Documentation"
52496 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52506 \begin_inset Newline newline
52510 \begin_inset Flex URL
52513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52515 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52523 \begin_layout Bibliography
52524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52525 LatexCommand bibitem
52532 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52534 name "Documentation"
52535 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52540 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52542 \begin_inset Newline newline
52546 \begin_inset Flex URL
52549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52551 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52559 \begin_layout Bibliography
52560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52561 LatexCommand bibitem
52568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52570 name "Documentation"
52571 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52576 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52582 \begin_inset Index idx
52585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52593 \begin_inset Newline newline
52597 \begin_inset Flex URL
52600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52602 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52610 \begin_layout Bibliography
52611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52612 LatexCommand bibitem
52619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52621 name "Documentation"
52622 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52627 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52633 \begin_inset Index idx
52636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52638 packages ! enumitem
52644 \begin_inset Newline newline
52648 \begin_inset Flex URL
52651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52653 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52661 \begin_layout Bibliography
52662 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52663 LatexCommand bibitem
52670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52672 name "Documentation"
52673 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52678 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52684 \begin_inset Index idx
52687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52689 packages ! fancyhdr
52695 \begin_inset Newline newline
52699 \begin_inset Flex URL
52702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52704 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52712 \begin_layout Bibliography
52713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52714 LatexCommand bibitem
52721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52723 name "Documentation"
52724 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52729 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52735 \begin_inset Index idx
52738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52740 packages ! hyperref
52746 \begin_inset Newline newline
52750 \begin_inset Flex URL
52753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52755 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52763 \begin_layout Bibliography
52764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52765 LatexCommand bibitem
52772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52774 name "Documentation"
52775 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52780 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52786 \begin_inset Index idx
52789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52791 packages ! microtype
52797 \begin_inset Newline newline
52801 \begin_inset Flex URL
52804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52806 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52814 \begin_layout Bibliography
52815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52816 LatexCommand bibitem
52823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52825 name "Documentation"
52826 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52831 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52837 \begin_inset Index idx
52840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52848 \begin_inset Newline newline
52852 \begin_inset Flex URL
52855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52857 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52865 \begin_layout Bibliography
52866 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52867 LatexCommand bibitem
52874 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52876 name "Documentation"
52877 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52882 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52888 \begin_inset Index idx
52891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52893 packages ! prettyref
52899 \begin_inset Newline newline
52903 \begin_inset Flex URL
52906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52908 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52916 \begin_layout Bibliography
52917 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52918 LatexCommand bibitem
52925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52927 name "Documentation"
52928 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52933 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52939 \begin_inset Index idx
52942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52944 packages ! refstyle
52950 \begin_inset Newline newline
52954 \begin_inset Flex URL
52957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52959 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52967 \begin_layout Bibliography
52968 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52969 LatexCommand bibitem
52976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52979 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52984 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52986 \begin_inset Newline newline
52990 \begin_inset Flex URL
52993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52995 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53003 \begin_layout Bibliography
53004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53005 LatexCommand bibitem
53012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53015 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53020 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53022 \begin_inset Newline newline
53026 \begin_inset Flex URL
53029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53031 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53039 \begin_layout Bibliography
53040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53041 LatexCommand bibitem
53048 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53051 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53056 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53057 for Cyrillic languages:
53058 \begin_inset Newline newline
53062 \begin_inset Flex URL
53065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53067 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53075 \begin_layout Bibliography
53076 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53077 LatexCommand bibitem
53084 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53087 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53092 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53094 \begin_inset Newline newline
53098 \begin_inset Flex URL
53101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53103 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53111 \begin_layout Bibliography
53112 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53113 LatexCommand bibitem
53120 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53123 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53128 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53130 \begin_inset Newline newline
53134 \begin_inset Flex URL
53137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53139 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53147 \begin_layout Bibliography
53148 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53149 LatexCommand bibitem
53156 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53159 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53164 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53166 \begin_inset Newline newline
53170 \begin_inset Flex URL
53173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53175 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53183 \begin_layout Standard
53184 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53218 \begin_inset Note Note
53221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53228 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53229 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53230 bibliography is the second one:
53238 \begin_layout Standard
53239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53240 LatexCommand bibtex
53241 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53242 options "biblio/alphadin"
53249 \begin_layout Standard
53250 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53254 \begin_layout Standard
53258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53264 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53273 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53281 \begin_inset Note Note
53284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53285 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53286 \begin_inset space ~
53290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53292 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53304 \begin_layout Standard
53305 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53306 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53312 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53313 LatexCommand printindex